- Manuals
- Brands
- Siemens Manuals
- Measuring Instruments
- Sitrans LR200
- Instruction manual
-
Contents
-
Table of Contents
-
Troubleshooting
-
Bookmarks
Quick Links
Instruction Manual August 2006
sitrans
LR 200 (PROFIBUS PA)
Related Manuals for Siemens SITRANS LR200
Summary of Contents for Siemens SITRANS LR200
-
Page 1
Instruction Manual August 2006 sitrans LR 200 (PROFIBUS PA) -
Page 2
The user is responsible for all changes and repairs made to the device by the user or the user’s agent. • All new components are to be provided by Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments Inc. • Restrict repair to faulty components only. -
Page 3: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents Table of Contents …………………….i Safety Notes ………………………..1 Safety marking symbols ………………….1 The Manual ………………………….1 Application Examples ……………………2 Abbreviations and Identifications …………………2 SITRANS LR 200 ……………………4 Applications ……………………….4 System Implementation …………………..5 Programming ……………………..5 Approvals and Certificates ………………….5 Specifications ……………………
-
Page 4
Write locking ……………………..20 How to do a Master Reset ………………….20 Fault Reset ……………………..20 Quick Setup ………………………..21 Activating SITRANS LR 200 ………………….21 Setting the PROFIBUS address via the hand programmer ……….21 Performing calibration via PROFIBUS PA …………….22 Using Auto False Echo Suppression ……………… -
Page 5
Appendix B: Troubleshooting ………………42 General Fault Codes ……………………..42 Appendix C: Maintenance ………………..43 Unit Repair and Excluded Liability ………………..43 Appendix D: Flange Adapter Versions …………….44 Dimensions: PTFE Rod Antenna, FF Flange ………………44 Dimensions: PTFE Rod, Threaded Connection …………….45 Dimensions: PTFE Rod, Threaded Connection, Shielded …………46 Dimensions: Horn Antenna with FF Flange ………………47 Dimensions: Waveguide Antenna with FF Flange …………….48 Dimensions: Sliding Waveguide Configuration …………….49… -
Page 6
Appendix G: LCD menu structure ………………65 Appendix H: PROFIBUS PA Profile Structure …………..69 PROFIBUS Level Device Design ………………….69 Block Model for recording and processing measured values ……..69 Description of the blocks ………………….70 Transducer block function groups………………70 Analog Input Function Blocks 1 and 2……………… 72 Appendix J: Asynchronous Communications Data Map ……….75 Directory………………………. -
Page 7: Safety Notes
This manual will help you set up your SITRANS LR 200 for optimum performance. We always welcome suggestions and comments about manual content, design, and accessibility. Please direct your comments to techpubs.smpi@siemens.com. For other Siemens Milltronics level measurement manuals, go to: www.siemens.com/level, and look under Level Measurement. 7ML19985HP01 SITRANS LR 200 (PROFIBUS PA) –…
-
Page 8: Application Examples
A standard level application is found on page 23: see also Applications on page 59. If you require more information, please contact your Siemens Milltronics representative. For a complete list of Siemens Milltronics representatives, go to www.siemens.com/ processautomation. Abbreviations and Identifications…
-
Page 9
Short Units Long Form Description form (cont’ d ) Full Vacuum Electrostatic Discharge Input current Output current Intrinsically Safe safety approval Internal inductance Level Radar Level Transducer Block milliHenry Henry µF microFarad Farad µs microsecond Second Process Automation (PROFIBUS) Process Device Manager (SIMATIC) Pressure Equipment safety approval… -
Page 10: Sitrans Lr 200
SITRANS LR 200 SITRANS LR 200 (PROFIBUS PA) is a 2-wire loop-powered, continuous level measuring instrument that uses advanced pulse radar technology at 5.8 GHz (6.3 GHz in North America). The instrument consists of an electronic component coupled to the antenna and process connection.
-
Page 11: System Implementation
System Implementation SITRANS LR 200 supports PROFIBUS communication protocol, and SIMATIC PDM software. Basic PLC configuration with PROFIBUS PA active PLC PC/laptop PROFIBUS DP DP/PA coupler PROFIBUS PA SITRANS LR 200 (PROFIBUS PA) Programming SITRANS LR 200 carries out its level measurement function according to the set of built-in parameters.
-
Page 12: Specifications
Specifications Notes: • Siemens Milltronics makes every attempt to ensure the accuracy of these specifications but reserves the right to change them at any time. SITRANS LR 200 (PROFIBUS PA) Power Bus powered On PROFIBUS PA, as per IEC 61158-2 Current consumed 10.5 mA (General Purpose or Intrinsically Safe…
-
Page 13: Interface
Programmer (infrared keypad) Siemens Milltronics Infrared IS (Intrinsically Safe) Hand Programmer for hazardous and all other locations (battery is non-replaceable). • approval ATEX II 1 G, EEx ia IIC T4, certificate SIRA 01ATEX2147 FM/CSA: Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D •…
-
Page 14: Environmental
Enclosure: • construction aluminum, polyester powder-coated • conduit entry 2 x M20, or 2 x 1/2″ NPT with adaptor • ingress protection Type 4X / NEMA 4X, Type 6 / NEMA 6, IP 67, IP68 (see note below) Weight: • standard model <…
-
Page 15: Approvals (Verify Against Device Nameplate)
Approvals (verify against device nameplate) • General , FM, CE US/C • Radio Europe: R&TTE US:FCC Canada:Industry Canada • Hazardous Intrinsically Safe: (Europe) ATEX II 1 G EEx ia IIC (US/Canada) FM/CSA: (barrier required) Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Div.
-
Page 16: Installation
Installation WARNINGS: • SITRANS LR 200 is to be used only in the manner outlined in this manual, otherwise protection provided by the equipment may be impaired. • Installation shall only be performed by qualified personnel and in accordance with local governing regulations. •…
-
Page 17
(The concavity of the top can focus echoes into the centre, giving false readings.) Note: Under certain circumstances, it may be acceptable to mount SITRANS LR 200 at the centre of a flat-topped tank: please discuss this with your Siemens Milltronics Representative. Coni preferred… -
Page 18: Location On A Nozzle, Or On A Manhole Cover
Location on a nozzle, or on a manhole cover Notes: • Use the 100 mm (4″) shield on nozzles that are 100 mm (4″) in length, or shorter. • Use the 250 mm (10″) shield on nozzles that are 250 mm (10″) in length, or shorter. On a nozzle, the end of the shield section should protrude a minimum of 10 mm (0.4”) to avoid interference.
-
Page 19: Sitrans Lr 200 Dimensions
SITRANS LR 200 Dimensions 50 mm 1/2″ NPT cable entry (2.0″) (or alternatively, M20 cable gland) threaded cover 109 mm (4.3″) 185 mm 154 mm (7.3″) (6. 1 «) enclosure/ electronics 158 mm 121 mm (6.2″) locking ring (4.8″) ref. point 23 mm (0.9») process device tag…
-
Page 20: Wiring
Wiring Power WARNINGS: dc terminals shall be supplied from an SELV source in accordance with IEC-1010-1 Annex H. All field wiring must have insulation suitable for rated voltages. Connecting SITRANS LR 200 (PROFIBUS PA) Note: Wiring Details For detailed information on Intrinsically Safe setups, please see on page 107.
-
Page 21
For Intrinsically Safe applications, connect the cable shield to the instrument shield connection, and ground the shield to the device using the external ground lug and an equal-potential grounding grid. For more detail on Explosion Siemens Process Automation Protection, you can download the brochure Explosion Protection (part number A5E00265440) from: https://pia.khe.siemens.com/index.asp?Nr=4236. -
Page 22: Startup
Startup Only two steps are necessary for a Quick Setup (see page 21 for detailed instructions): Use the hand programmer to set the PROFIBUS address locally. Use SIMATIC PDM to calibrate the four set points: High and Low Calibration Point, and High and Low Level Point.
-
Page 23: Hand Programmer: Key Functions In Run Mode
Hand Programmer: key functions in RUN mode Function Updates internal enclosure temperature value and displays it in LCD secondary region. Updates echo confidence value and displays it in LCD secondary region. Updates measurement value and displays it in LCD secondary region. Programming SITRANS LR 200 (PROFIBUS PA) The parameters that control the operation of the LR 200 are organized into function groups, and arranged in a 4-level menu structure that can be accessed either via the…
-
Page 24: Program Mode Display
The hand programmer has two modes of operation: Navigation Mode • in this mode, the rightmost digit of the menu number flashes (the PROGRAM icon is not visible) • up/down arrows change the mode number • pressing the right/left arrows once moves to the next/previous menu •…
-
Page 25: Hand Programmer: Key Functions In Navigation Mode
Hand Programmer: key functions in Navigation mode When Name Navigation Mode displaying: Up or down menu or item Show previous or next menu or item. arrow menu Show first item in the selected menu, or next menu. Right arrow item Change to Edit mode.
-
Page 26: Security
Security Local operation enable Local Operation can be enabled or disabled via PDM. Go to Identification > Device > Local Operation Enable and select the desired setting. Remote operation enable Remote Operation can be enabled or disabled via the hand programmer. To change the setting: •…
-
Page 27: Quick Setup
Quick Setup Activating SITRANS LR 200 Note: Keep infrared devices such as laptops, cell phones, and PDAs, away from SITRANS LR 200 to prevent inadvertent operation. Power up the instrument. SITRANS LR 200 starts in RUN mode, and the LCD displays the output of AIFB1.
-
Page 28: Performing Calibration Via Profibus Pa
PDM. Please consult the operating instructions or online help for details on using SMPI PROFIBUS PA instruments and SIMATIC PDM. (An Application Guide SIMATIC PDM is available on our website: www.siemens.com/processautomation.) Changing parameter settings • First launch SIMATIC PDM, connect to SITRANS LR 200, and upload data from the device.
-
Page 29: Using Auto False Echo Suppression
Calibration – steps 1 to 7 Open the menu Device – Sensor Calibration and select the button Dry Calibration (Click on Additional Information to see the schematic showing the PROFIBUS parameters.) Enter the new value for Low Calibration Point (default units are meters). Enter the corresponding value for Low Level Point in percent (default is 0).
-
Page 30: Remote Operation Via Profibus Pa
PDM. You can locate the Device Description in Device Catalog, under Sensors/Level/ Echo/Siemens Milltronics. If you do not see SITRANS LR 200 under Siemens Milltronics, you can download it from our web site. Go to the SITRANS LR 200 product page at https://pia.khe.siemens.com/index.asp?Nr=7427 and click Downloads.
-
Page 31: Configuration
The GSD file The GSD file SIEM810F.gsd is available from the SITRANS LR 200 product page on our web site. Go to https://pia.khe.siemens.com/index.asp?Nr=7427 and click Downloads. Download the DeviceInstall, and run it from your computer. This will install the GSD file into your system (as long as you are using SIMATIC software).
-
Page 32: Cyclic Data
Cyclic Data When you configure SITRANS LR 200 on the PROFIBUS PA bus, there are two slots available for modules. Note: Each of the slots has to have a module defined in it. Slot 0 always transmits AIFB1 information ; slot 1 defaults to Free Place, but can be changed to AIFB2 information.
-
Page 33: Diagnostics
Status Codes for Bad Quality Values in hex notation Description The LOE timer has expired: this could be caused by 0x10 LOE or by a sensor malfunction: value is BAD. There is an error in the configuration of the function 0x01 blocks in PROFIBUS PA The function block has been placed out of service.
-
Page 34: Acyclic Diagnostics
Acyclic Diagnostics This consists of four bytes. Indication Hex values Byte Description class 0x01000000 Electronics failure 0x02000000 Mechanical failure 0x04000000 Motor Temperature too high 0x08000000 Electronics temperature too high 0x10000000 Memory error 0X20000000 Measurement failure 0X40000000 Device not initialized (no calibration) 0x80000000 Self calibration failed 0x00010000…
-
Page 35: Acyclic Extended Diagnostics (General Fault Codes)
Acyclic Extended Diagnostics (General Fault Codes) In addition to the extended diagnostics available by cyclic data exchange (shown above), further extended diagnostics are available via acyclic communications. This consists of Appendix J: Asynchronous Communications Data Map six bytes. Please see on page 75, for the location of the «Extended Diagnostics».
-
Page 36
Meaning Corrective Action Byte (cont display ’ d ) Check the configuration for AIFB1. The input values for Ensure that Upper Value and Process Value Scale for S:14 Lower Value (Process Value AIFB1 are equal. Scale) are not equal. Check the configuration for AIFB2. The input values for Ensure that Upper Value and Process Value Scale for… -
Page 37: Acyclic Data
Meaning Corrective Action Byte (cont display ’ d ) The velocity calibration for the device is Return the device to the factory. S:34 incorrect. Cycle the power. This may temporarily solve the problem. Do The device did not not use the device for S:35 initialize properly.
-
Page 38: Configuration Example
To configure and use PROFIBUS PA with an S7-300/ 400 PLC If SITRANS LR 200 is not listed in the STEP 7 device catalog, you can download the DeviceInstall file from the Siemens Milltronics Web site and run it from your computer. Go to https://pia.khe.siemens.com/index.asp?Nr=7427 and click Downloads.
-
Page 39: Appendix A: Technical Reference
Appendix A: Technical Reference Principles of Operation SITRANS LR 200 is a sophisticated radar instrument that uses advanced microwave pulse technology to provide non-contacting continuous level measurement in liquids or slurries. Radar level measurement uses the time of flight principle to determine distance to a material surface.
-
Page 40: Echo Lock
Echo Lock When the echoes are received, the relevant echo algorithm is applied to determine the true material echo. If the selected echo is within the window, the window is then centered about the echo. Otherwise the window widens with each successive shot until the selected echo is within the window, which then returns to its normal width.
-
Page 41: Failsafe Mode
Failsafe Mode Failsafe mode may be triggered by a loss of echo, a bad configuration, or certain device faults. You can select can select one of three possible values to be reported when a Failsafe mode occurs: • Default value (Failsafe value) used as output value. •…
-
Page 42
When you set Auto False-Echo Suppression to «Learn,» the instrument learns the echo profile at that moment . Then it uses the learned profile instead of the default TVT curve, for the distance set in Auto False Echo Suppression Distance. The learned profile (learned TVT curve) follows the echo profile, so that no large false echoes rise above the learned TVT curve. -
Page 43: Maximum Process Temperature Chart
Maximum Process Temperature Chart WARNING: Internal temperature must not exceed 80 C (176 Note: The chart below is for guidance only. Maximum Flange and Process Temperatures versus Allowable Ambient for Polypropylene Rod or Flange Adaptor versions of SITRANS LR 200 polypropylene flange process…
-
Page 44: Process Pressure/Temperature Derating Curves
Process Pressure/Temperature derating curves Notes: • These configurations are subject to revision: other options may be added. • Process configuration numbers are not final. • The Process Device Tag shall remain with the process pressure boundary assembly . In the event the instrument package is replaced, the Process Device Tag shall be transferred to the replacement unit.
-
Page 45: Rod Antenna Ansi Hole Pattern Flanges
51003. • Reference drawing number is shown on the process device tag. You can find this drawing on our website: www.siemens.com/ processautomation, on the LR 200 product page, under Process Connection Specifications. process temperature (°C) 2”…
-
Page 46: Rod Antenna Threaded Connections
• Reference drawing number is shown on the process device tag. You can find this drawing on our website: www.siemens.com/ processautomation, on the LR 200 product page, under Process Connection process temperature (°C) Specifications.
-
Page 47: Horn Antenna Or Wave Guide — Ansi Hole Pattern Flanges
22452 stamped on flange. • Reference drawing number is shown on the process device tag. You can find this drawing on our website: www.siemens.com/ processautomation, on the LR 200 product page, under Process Connection process temperature (°C) Specifications.
-
Page 48: Appendix B: Troubleshooting
20. Also make sure that Write Locking is Off. See Write locking on page 20. If you continue to experience problems, go to our website at www.siemens.com/ processautomation, and check the FAQs for SITRANS LR 200, or contact your Siemens Milltronics representative.
-
Page 49: Appendix C: Maintenance
Please note the following: • The user is responsible for all changes and repairs made to the device. • All new components must be provided by Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments Inc. • Restrict repair to faulty components only.
-
Page 50: Appendix D: Flange Adapter Versions
Process temperature and pressure capabilities are dependent upon information on the process device tag. Reference drawing listed on the tag is available on our website at www.siemens.com/processautomation, on the product page for SITRANS LR 200, under Process Connection Specifications. Page 44 SITRANS LR 200 (PROFIBUS PA) –…
-
Page 51: Dimensions: Ptfe Rod, Threaded Connection
Process temperature and pressure capabilities are dependent upon information on the process device tag. Reference drawing listed on the tag is available on our website at www.siemens.com/processautomation, on the product page for SITRANS LR 200, under Process Connection Specifications. WARNING: For pressure applications, it will be necessary to use PTFE tape or other appropriate thread sealing compound, and to tighten the process connection beyond hand-tight.
-
Page 52: Dimensions: Ptfe Rod, Threaded Connection, Shielded
Process temperature and pressure capabilities are dependent upon information on the process device tag. Reference drawing listed on the tag is available on our website at www.siemens.com/processautomation, on the product page for SITRANS LR 200, under Process Connection Specifications. WARNING: For pressure applications, it will be necessary to use PTFE tape or other appropriate thread sealing compound, and to tighten the process connection beyond hand-tight.
-
Page 53: Dimensions: Horn Antenna With Ff Flange
• Process temperature and pressure capabilities are dependent upon information on the process device tag. Reference drawing listed on the tag is available on our website at www.siemens.com/processautomation, on the product page for SITRANS LR 200 (PROFIBUS PA), under Process Connection Specifications.
-
Page 54: Dimensions: Waveguide Antenna With Ff Flange
• Process temperature and pressure capabilities are dependent upon information on the process device tag. Reference drawing listed on the tag is available on our website at www.siemens.com/processautomation, on the product page for SITRANS LR 200, under Process Connection Specifications.
-
Page 55: Dimensions: Sliding Waveguide Configuration
• Process temperature and pressure capabilities are dependent upon information on the process device tag. Reference drawing listed on the tag is available on our website at www.siemens.com/processautomation, on the product page for SITRANS LR 200, under Process Connection Specifications.
-
Page 56: Dimensions: Sanitary Rod Antenna
Process temperature and pressure capabilities are dependent upon information on the process device tag. Reference drawing listed on the tag is available on our website at www.siemens.com/processautomation, on the product page for SITRANS LR 200, under Process Connection Specifications. Page 50 SITRANS LR 200 (PROFIBUS PA) –…
-
Page 57: Dimensions: Flanges
Dimensions: Flanges bolt hole Ø enclosure mounting holes (threaded) flange O.D. 20 mm (0.8”), nominal horn/waveguide mounting holes (threaded) bolt hole circle Ø process side See chart on page 52 for further details on flange sizes. 7ML19985HP01 SITRANS LR 200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 51…
-
Page 58
Bolt Hole Number Pipe size Flange Size Flange O.D. Bolt Hole Ø Circle Ø of Bolts 2” ANSI 150# 6.0” 4.75” .7” 3” ANSI 150# 7.5” 6.0” .75” 4” ANSI 150# 9.0” 7.50” .75” 6” ANSI 150# 11.0” 9.50” .88” 8”… -
Page 59: Mounting Instructions
Mounting Instructions Mounting PTFE Rod Antenna, FF Flange 1/2″ NPT wiring access or M20 x 1.5 cover cable entry locking ring process device tag customer-flanged nozzle to suit vessel Correctly Mounted Instrument minimum diameter 2″ / DIN 50 customer flange integral process seal nozzle/vessel juncture straight/taper transition…
-
Page 60: Rod Assembly
>150 mm (6”) n/r: extension not required * Consult Siemens Milltronics for assistance with nozzle sizes not listed. ** Application not recommended for 50 mm (2”) I.D. nozzles longer than 100 mm (4”). Shielded rod antennas are available for these applications.
-
Page 61: Mounting: Rod Antenna
Mounting: Rod Antenna Ideally, the nozzle should be as short as possible. If your application requires a nozzle that exceeds our recommended maximum length, consider using a shielded rod configuration. If you create a new nozzle for the radar instrument, the weld seams must be on the outside of the nozzle.
-
Page 62: Mounting: Horn Antenna And Shielded Rod Antenna
Mounting: Horn Antenna and Shielded Rod Antenna. 10 mm (0.4″) 10 mm (0.4″) The end of the horn should protrude The end of the shield should protrude a minimum of 10 mm (0.4”) to avoid a minimum of 10 mm (0.4”) to avoid interference with the nozzle.
-
Page 63: Mounting: Stillpipe Or Sidepipe
Mounting: Stillpipe or Sidepipe This is an alternative to the waveguide antenna option, used for products with an ε less than 3 or for extremely turbulent or vortex conditions. This mounting arrangement can also be used to provide optimum signal conditions on foaming materials. Suitable pipe diameters are 50 mm (2”) to 250 mm (10”).
-
Page 64: Mounting: Horn With Waveguide Extensions
Mounting: Horn with Waveguide Extensions Use this combination if the nozzle is long and the diameter is small. For example, if the nozzle is 100 mm (4”) in diameter and 460 mm (18”) in length), the rod antenna is not suitable due to nozzle interference.
-
Page 65: Appendix E: Special Applications
Appendix E: Special Applications Application Example: Stillpipe This mounting arrangement can be used for products with an ε of less than 3, or if extremely turbulent or vortex conditions exist. It can also be used to provide optimum signal conditions on foaming materials. Notes: •…
-
Page 66
Parameter Select/Enter Hand Programmer Values Auto False Echo distance to material distance to material minus 0.5 m Suppression Distance minus 0.5 m Auto False Echo Suppression Press Mode to return to RUN: and start normal operation. Propagation Factor Value Pipe Inside Diameter (Typical)* 50 mm (2”) 0.827… -
Page 67: Appendix F: Programming Via The Hand Programmer
Appendix F: programming via the hand programmer Although the complete range of parameters is only accessible via PDM , you can access and adjust many of the parameters via the Siemens Milltronics infrared hand programmer. Appendix K: Parameter Descriptions •…
-
Page 68: Write Locking
Write locking Write locking prevents any changes to parameters, either via PDM or the hand programmer, but still allows access to the device. 2547 (unlock value) Enables parameter changes Values any other value Disables parameter changes Go to Write Locking: dentification Menu 1.
-
Page 69: Individual Parameter Reset
Example: do a Profile reset Go to Reset: 1. Identification Menu 1. 2. Configuration 1.2.3. Reset Press the Right ARROW key to open Edit mode. Key in 1 (Profile Reset) to reset all parameters except PROFIBUS address. Press the Right ARROW key again, to accept the changes and return to Navigation mode.
-
Page 70: Device Calibration
Device calibration Only four settings are required for a Quick Setup: High Calibration Point, Low Calibration Calibration Point, High Level Point, and Low Level Point. (For an illustration, see page 22.) 2.3. Sensor Calibration: 2.3.1. Sensor Units (default meters) 2.3.2. Calibration Type. «Dry»…
-
Page 71: Appendix G: Lcd Menu Structure
Appendix G: LCD menu structure SITRANS LR 200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 65 SITRANS LR 200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985HP01…
-
Page 72
Appendix G: menu structure Input Detailed Setup Failsafe Identification Configuration 6. Detailed Setup 1. Failsafe 1. LOE Timer 1. Identification 2. Configuration 1. Device Address 2. Volume Volume 3. Device 2. Remote Lockout 3. Echo select 4. Statistics 3. Master Reset Table A 1. -
Page 73
Output AIFB1 3. Output 1. AIFB1 1. Target Mode 2. AIFB2 2. Unit 3. Filter Time Constant Batch Information 4. Function 1. Batch ID 5. Batch Information 2. Batch Unit 6. Process Value Scale 3. Batch operation 7. Output Scale 4. -
Page 74
Notes Page 68 SITRANS LR 200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985HP01… -
Page 75: Appendix H: Profibus Pa Profile Structure
Appendix H: PROFIBUS PA Profile Structure PROFIBUS Level Device Design The device follows the profile block model and is implemented as a Profile 3.0, Class B, PA device. Standard profile parameters are used to program the level transducer block. Block Model for recording and processing measured values The functions of the device are divided into blocks for different areas of responsibility.
-
Page 76: Description Of The Blocks
Description of the blocks Transducer block function groups The figure below shows the signal flow of measured values from the sensor through the Transducer block into the output value (Primary Value/ Level or Volume; Secondary Value 1 / Level; Secondary Value 2 /Distance 1; or Secondary Value 3 / Distance 2). The Level TB implements all of the basic parameters (see parameter diagram on page 71), including level to volume calculation, if that option has been selected.
-
Page 77
Level Calibration is a linear transfer function that converts a sensor value to a level value. The level value is used for volume calculation, if that function is enabled. Level High Level Point Level Value Low Level Point Calibration Low Calibration Point Sensor Value High Calibration Point Sensor Reference… -
Page 78: Analog Input Function Blocks 1 And 2
Electronics temperature The transducer block also monitors the internal temperature of the device electronics. If the temperature exceeds permitted limits, it does not change the sensor value, but it does change the status.The permitted limits correspond to those of the permitted ambient temperature.
-
Page 79
How the AIFBs work The Analog Input Function Blocks allow you to control modifications to the output value (PROFIBUS cyclic data). Output Conversion Values transmitted by the Level TB have a status attached. The decision on what to do with each value is made by the Analog Input Function Block. Device/ Input Simulation The input can be a simulated value instead of a TB OUT value. -
Page 80
The scaling output is applied. For example: AIFB Out (or AIFB Out) straight to LCD (same values displayed on LCD as PLC) Output range: This value is filtered using a first order filter based on a time constant provided by the user. -
Page 81: Appendix J: Asynchronous Communications Data Map
Appendix J: Asynchronous Communications Data Map Directory Size Slot Index Value Description (bytes) Directory Header 1 — Directory ID 1 — Revision Number 3 — Number of entries 8 — Directory Entries 1 — First Composite List 3 — Num Composite Lists List Directory Entry Index No.
-
Page 82
Relative Name Access Structure Type (cont’d) Index ST REV Value UNSIGNED_INTEGER(2) Value ASCII(32) Strategy Value UNSIGNED_INTEGER(2) Alert Key Value UNSIGNED_INTEGER (1) Target Mode Value UNSIGNED_INTEGER (1) Actual Mode UNSIGNED_INTEGER (1) Mode Block Permitted Modes UNSIGNED_INTEGER (1) Normal Mode UNSIGNED_INTEGER (1) Current States UNSIGNED_INTEGER (1) Unacknowledged… -
Page 83: Analog Input Function Blocks: Aifb1 And Aifb2
Relative Name Access Structure Type (cont’d) Index Powered Hours UNSIGNED_INTEGER (4) Device Wear Poweron Resets UNSIGNED_INTEGER (2) Reserved Reserved Date of Birth Value ASCII (16) Powered Seconds Value UNSIGNED_INTEGER (4) Boot Revision Value ASCII (16) Reset Fault Value UNSIGNED_INTEGER (2) Profibus Address View Object Value…
-
Page 84
Relative Name Access Structure Type (cont’ d ) Index Current States UNSIGNED_INTEGER (1) Unacknowledged UNSIGNED_INTEGER (1) Alarm Sum- mary Unreported UNSIGNED_INTEGER (1) Disabled UNSIGNED_INTEGER (1) Batch ID UNSIGNED_INTEGER(4) Batch RUP UNSIGNED_INTEGER (2) Batch Informa- tion Batch Operation UNSIGNED_INTEGER(2) Batch Phase UNSIGNED_INTEGER(2) Value FLOAT… -
Page 85: Transducer Block (Level)
Relative Name Access Structure Type (cont’ d ) Index Status UNSIGNED_INTEGER(1) Simulation Value FLOAT Enable UNSIGNED_INTEGER(1) Out Unit Text ASCII(16) Max Out Value FLOAT Min Out Value FLOAT fbViewObject Value BYTE(18) Transducer Block (Level) This is the main transducer block for the device. (A second block is for internal use only.) Relative Name Access Structure…
-
Page 86
Relative Name Access Structure Type (cont’d) Index Value FLOAT Status INTEGER (1) PV Units Value INTEGER (2) Level Value FLOAT Level Units Value UNSIGNED_INTEGER (2) Sensor Value Value FLOAT Sensor Units Value INTEGER (2) Value FLOAT Status INTEGER (1) SV1 Units Value INTEGER (2) Value… -
Page 87
Relative Name Access Structure Type (cont’d) Index Min Tempera- Value FLOAT ture Value FLOAT Status UNSIGNED_INTEGER (1) SV3 Units Value UNSIGNED_INTEGER (2) Transducer INTEGER (2) Basic setup Algorithm INTEGER (1) Response Rate INTEGER (1) Lock INTEGER (1) Window Sill UNSIGNED_INTEGER (1) TVT Hover INTEGER (1) Confidence… -
Page 88
Relative Name Access Structure Type (cont’d) Index FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT XY10 FLOAT FLOAT XY11 FLOAT 92- 129 Reserved Velocity FLOAT Propagation FLOAT Factor Dim A FLOAT Tank shape Dim L… -
Page 89
Relative Name Access Structure Type (cont’d) Index Point 7 INTEGER (1) Point 8 INTEGER (1) Point 9 INTEGER (1) Point 10 INTEGER (1) Point 11 INTEGER (1) Point 12 INTEGER (1) Point 13 INTEGER (1) Point 14 INTEGER (1) Point 15 INTEGER (1) Point 16 INTEGER (1) -
Page 90
Relative Name Access Structure Type (cont’d) Index Lock Window Value FLOAT Reserved Echo Window Value FLOAT Used Upper limit FLOAT Measuring Range Lower Limit FLOAT tbViewObject Page 84 SITRANS LR 200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985HP01… -
Page 91: Appendix K: Parameter Descriptions
Appendix K: Parameter Descriptions SITRANS LR 200 (PROFIBUS PA): parameter menus The parameters are grouped in menus according to function. Submenus, arranged on four levels, give access to associated features and options. Some menus are accessible in PDM only via pull-down menus: in those cases, directions are given beside the individual parameter.
-
Page 92: 1.3. Device
1.2.3. Master Reset Note: Following a Master Reset, complete reprogramming is required. Reset all parameters (except PROFIBUS address) to PROFIBUS PA profile default values Values 2506 Warm Start: restart the device (this option is rarely used) 2712 Reset PROFIBUS address to 126 32768 Reset to manufacturer’s default values (factory settings) 1.2.4.
-
Page 93
1.3.3. Hardware Revision Corresponds to the electronics hardware of the Field Device. Profile Revision PROFIBUS PA Profile standard that this device conforms to. Static Revision No. The revision level of the static data associated with the Physical Block. The Static Revision No. -
Page 94: Statistics
1.4. Statistics 1.4.1. Powered Hours Number of hours the unit has been powered up since manufacture. 1.4.2. Poweron Resets The number of power cycles that have occurred since manufacture. 2. Input Static Revision Number The revision level of the static data associated with the Transducer Block, updated whenever a standard profile configuration parameter is changed.
-
Page 95
2.2.2. Response Rate Sets the reaction speed of the device to measurement changes in the target range. Related Echo Response Empty LOE Timer para- Fill Rate Rate Rate (minutes) Lock meters 1 * slow 0.1 m/minute 0.1 m/minute material Values medium 1 m/minute 1 m/minute… -
Page 96: Sensor Calibration
2.3. Sensor Calibration Sensor Reference Point (flange face) Sensor Offset High Level Point High Calibration (default: 100%) Sensor Value Point Level Low Calibration Low Level Point Point (default: 0%) Level Offset Secondary Value 1 2.3.1. Sensor Units Whatever units the sensor is measuring in. 2.3.2.
-
Page 97: 2.4. Measuring Limits
2.3.5. Unit (Level) Selected engineering units for Level (PV). • Referenced from Low Level Point (plus level offset, if any) • Default % • Can be any linear measurement 2.3.6. Low Level Point The level when the material is at Low Calibration Point. The unit is defined in Level units.
-
Page 98: 2.5. Linearization
2.4.5. Process Temperature Min. The minimum recorded temperature of the internal electronics. Open the menu View – Peak Values and select the tab Temperature. If necessary, click on the reset button, and download to the device. 2.4.6. Process Temperature Max. The maximum recorded temperature of the internal electronics.
-
Page 99
Also required Vessel Shape Description upright, linear (flat bottom) linearization volume conical or pyramidal bottom linearization volume, dimension A linearization volume, parabolic bottom dimension A linearization volume, half-sphere bottom dimension A linearization volume, flat sloped bottom dimension A parabolic end horizontal linearization volume, cylinder dimension A, dimension L… -
Page 100: 2.6. Detailed Setup
2.5.3. Linearization Volume The maximum volume of the tank. Units are defined in Primary Value units. For readings in volumetric units instead of percentage values, enter the vessel volume corresponding to High Calibration Point. Any volumetric units can be chosen, because the volume calculation is based on the maximum volume, and scaled according to the vessel shape selected.
-
Page 101
2.6.2. Volume When the vessel shape is too complex for any of the preconfigured shapes, you can define the shape as a series of segments. First assign a value to each level breakpoint., then assign a corresponding value to each volume breakpoint. (Volume values can be percent or volumetric;… -
Page 102
2.6.3. Echo select 2.6.3.1. Algorithm Selects the algorithm to be applied to the echo profile to extract the true echo. First echo argest echo (reserved for SMPI service Values personnel) best of Largest or irst echo (reserved for SMPI service personnel) 2.6.3.2. -
Page 103
0.955 150 mm (6”) 0.980 200 mm (8”) 0.990 Contact your Siemens Milltronics representative for other sizes and propagation factor numbers. Note: For waveguide antennas used as stillpipes, the propagation factor value is shown on the process device tag. SITRANS LR 200 distance 12.6 m… -
Page 104
«Blanking» or «Dead Zone».) Range: 0 to 20 m Values Default: 0.4 m This parameter is for use only by Siemens Milltronics service technicians. SITRANS LR 200 Dimensions For the standard configuration reference point, see Appendix D: Flange Adapter Versions page 13. -
Page 105
2.6.5.2. Far Range (HI RANGE) Note: Far Range can extend beyond the bottom of the tank. Maximum distance from the reference point , within which an echo should be considered valid. Range: 0 to 20 m Values Default: Low Calibration Point Echo Profile Echo Confidence Measures echo reliability. -
Page 106
2.6.6. TVT (Auto False Echo Suppression) setup Note: The Auto False Echo Suppression parameters are for authorized Siemens Milltronics Service personnel or technicians familiar with Siemens Milltronics echo processing techniques. View the echo profile first, before attempting to modify these parameters. -
Page 107
Display before Auto False Echo Suppression Window Default TVT Hover Level Echo Marker Distance (meters) Example after Auto False Echo Suppression Liquid TVT curve level (Learned) False echo Distance (meters) 2.6.6.8. Shaper Mode Adjusts the TVT curve at a specified range. 7ML19985HP01 SITRANS LR 200 (PROFIBUS PA) –… -
Page 108
2.6.7. TVT shaper A breakpoint on the TVT curve, normalized to 0. 2.6.7.1. Shaper A (1-9) 2.6.7.2. Shaper B (10-18) 2.6.7.3. Shaper C (19-27) 2.6.7.4. Shaper D (28-36) 2.6.7.5. Shaper E (37 — 40) 2.6.8. Rate 2.6.8.1. Fill Rate Defines the maximum rate at which the reported sensor value is allowed to increase.Allows you to further adjust the LR 200 response to increases in the actual material level (or an advance to a higher Failsafe Material Level, P071). -
Page 109
2.6.8.2. Empty rate Defines the maximum rate at which the reported sensor value is allowed to decrease.Adjusts the LR 200 response to decreases in the actual material level. Empty Rate is automatically updated whenever Response Rate is altered. 0.0000 to 99999 Range: m / min. -
Page 110: Output
3. Output 3.1. AIFB1 Static Revision No. The revision level of the static data associated with Analog Input Function Block 1. The Static Revision No. is updated whenever a standard profile configuration parameter is changed. 3.1.1. Target Mode Used to request an operating mode from the Function Block. Out of Service (O/S) Values Manual Mode (MAN)
-
Page 111
3.1.6. Process Value Scale 3.1.6.1. Lower Value Defines the operational lower range value of the input value (Process Value Scale) in engineering units. Process Value Scale normalizes the input value to a customer-defined range. 3.1.6.2. Upper Value Defines the operational upper range value of the input value (Process Value Scale) in engineering units. -
Page 112: 3.2. Aifb2
3.1.8.5. Limit Hysteresis Hysteresis is used to adjust the sensitivity of the trigger for alarm messages. It is used to compensate when a process variable fluctuates around the same value as a limit. A high level alarm occurs when a value exceeds an upper limit.
-
Page 113: Appendix L: Hazardous Area Installations
Wiring Details Intrinsically Safe Model FM/CSA (See page 111 for reference drawing 23650529, also available from the product page of our website: www.siemens.com/processautomation.) Under the entity evaluation concept, SITRANS LR 200 has the following characteristics: (input voltage) U = 24 V…
-
Page 114: Fm/Csa
For complete details and instructions regarding the FISCO Concept, see page 111 for drawing number 23650529, also available from the product page of our website: www.siemens.com/processautomation. The FISCO Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus to associated apparatus not specifically examined in such combination. The criteria for interconnection…
-
Page 115: Eu Equivalency
EU Equivalency Any zener diode safety barrier, certified by an EU approved certification body to [ EEx ia ] IIC, its output voltage (Uo) not exceeding 24 V and its output current (Io) limited by load resistance (Ro); such that Io = Uo / Ro, does not exceed 250 mA. Notes •…
-
Page 116: Product Nameplate
Product Nameplate Page 110 SITRANS LR 200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985HP01…
-
Page 117: Fm/Csa Intrinsically Safe Connection Drawing
FM/CSA Intrinsically Safe connection drawing Note: Reference drawing 23650529 is available from the product page of our website: www.siemens.com/processautomation. FISCO-Concept The FISCO Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus to associated apparatus not specifically examined in such combination. The criteria for interconnection is that the voltage (U or V…
-
Page 118
The number of passive devices connected to the bus segment is not limited due to I.S. reasons. If the above rules are respected, up to the specified total length, the inductance and capacitance of the cable will not impair the intrinsic safety or the installation. Notes: INTRINSICALLY SAFE CLASS I, II, III DIV. -
Page 119
Hazardous (Classified) Location Non-Hazardous Location Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Division 2, Groups E, F, G Class III T4 @ T a = –… -
Page 120
Hazardous (Classified) Location Non-Hazardous Location Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D Intrinsic safety barrier Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Division 2, Groups E, F, G Class III T4 @ T a = –… -
Page 121: Fm Class 1, Div. 2 Connection Drawing
FM Class 1, Div. 2 connection drawing Note: Reference drawing 23650537 is available from the product page of our website: www.siemens.com/processautomation. NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION (SAFE) CLASS I, DIV.2, GROUPS A, B, C, D METAL CONDUIT 1/2 “ NPT SITRANS LR 200/…
-
Page 122: Instructions Specific To Hazardous Area Installations
Instructions specific to hazardous area installations (Reference European ATEX Directive 94/9/EC, Annex II, 1/0/6) The following instructions apply to equipment covered by certificate number SIRA 03ATEX2142X: For use and assembly, refer to the main instructions. The equipment is certified for use as Category 1G equipment. The equipment may be used with flammable gases and vapors with apparatus group IIC and temperature class T4.
-
Page 123
The certification of this equipment relies upon the following materials used in its construction: Aluminum alloy ANSI ref. A380.0 (aluminum enclosure option) Valox 365 (injection moulded plastic enclosure option) Ultem 1010 (window on plastic enclosure option) Stycast 2651-40FR encapsulant, catalyst II The detailed composition of Aluminum A380.0 as used in the metal enclosure (threaded lid option only) is as follows: Si –… -
Page 124
Notes Page 118 SITRANS LR 200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985HP01… -
Page 125: Glossary
Glossary accuracy: degree of conformity of a measure to a standard or a true value. agitator: mechanical apparatus for mixing or aerating. A device for creating turbulence. algorithm: a prescribed set of well-defined rules or processes for the solution of a problem in a finite number of steps.
-
Page 126
confidence: describes the quality of an echo. HIgher values represent higher quality. Confidence threshold defines the minimum value. damping: term applied to the performance of an instrument to denote the manner in which the measurement settles to its steady indication after a change in the value of the level. dB (decibel): a unit used to measure the amplitude of signals. -
Page 127
frequency: the number of periods occurring per unit time. Frequency may be stated in cycles per second. hertz (Hz): unit of frequency, one cycle per second. 1 Gigahertz (GHz) is equal to 10 horn antenna: a conical, horn-shaped antenna which focuses microwave signals. The larger the horn diameter, the more focused the radar beam. -
Page 128
radar: radar is an acronym for RAdio Detection And Ranging. A device that radiates electromagnetic waves and utilizes the reflection of such waves from distant objects to determine their existence or position. range: distance between a transmitter and a target. range extension: the distance below the zero percent or empty point in a vessel. -
Page 129: Index
Index acyclic diagnostics 28 acyclic extended diagnostics 29 fault reset 20 flange sizes chart 52 abbreviations function keys list 2 edit mode 19 acyclic diagnostics navigation mode 19 fault codes 28 address 85 GSD file 25 address, PROFIBUS 21 agitator blade detection hand programmer avoiding 89 device calibration 64…
-
Page 130
hand programmer 18 stillpipe Near Range weld requirements 57 (blanking) 35 network address 25 temperature key 17 temperature specification operating principles 33 Ambient/Operating 10 terminals accessing 14 parameter setting TVT curve 35 changing 32 pipe sizes 52 power consumption 25 vessel shape power source conical top 11… -
Page 131
Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments Inc. Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments Inc. 2006 1954Technology Drive, P .O. Box 4225 Subject to change without prior notice Peterborough, ON, Canada K9J 7B1 Rev. 1.3 Tel: (705) 745-2431 Fax: (705) 741-0466 *7ml19985hp01* Email: techpubs.smpi@siemens.com…
Siemens Sitrans LR200 Transmitter PDF User Guides and Manuals for Free Download: Found (10) Manuals for Siemens Sitrans LR200 Device Model (Compact Operating Instructions, Quick Start Manual)
More Transmitter Device Models:
-
HK Instruments
AVT Series
Thank you for choosing an HK Instruments AVT Series Air Velocity Transducer. The AVT Series is intended for use in commercial environ-ments. It is designed with a duct mount probe and adjustable collar suitable for round or rectangular ducts. The AVT Series provides separate readings for air velocity and temperature.Th …
AVT Series Transducer, 4
-
Aplisens
PCE-28
USER’S MANUAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS PCE-28 DIFFERERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS PRE-28 AND HYDROSTATIC LEVEL PROBES PCE-28P EN.IO.PCE.PRE.28 AUGUST 2021 APLISENS S.A., 03-192 Warsaw, Morelowa 7 St. tel. +48 22 814 07 77; fax +48 22 814 07 78 www.aplisens.com, e-mail: [email protected] Revision 01.A.001 …
PCE-28 Transmitter, 26
-
Acoustic Research
ARW51
Introducing the ARW51 wireless speaker conversion system.Now you can turn any 5.1 speaker system into a CD-quality wirelesssystem, with the ARW51 wireless speaker conversion system from Acoustic Research. The ARW51’s true point-to-multipoint technology trans-mits full bandwidth 16-bit audio and eliminates audible noi …
ARW51 Transmitter, 1
-
Niko
410-00362
410-003621NLLees de volledige handleiding vóór installatie en ingebruikneming. Bewaar deze handleiding zorgvuldig voor later gebruik.1. BESCHRIJVINGDe draadloze tweekanaalszender is geschikt voor inbouw en mag enkel worden gebruikt om draadloze ontvangers te bedienen die werken volgens het Easywave protocol. De zend …
410-00362 Transmitter, 16
Recommended Documentation:
Radar Transmitters
SITRANS LR200 (HART)
Operating Instructions 12/2013
Safety Guidelines:
Warning notices must be observed to ensure personal safety as well as that of others, and to protect the product and the connected equipment. These warning notices are accompanied by a clarification of the level of caution to be observed.
Qualified Personnel:
This device/system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this manual. Qualified personnel are only authorized to install and operate this equipment in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Unit Repair and Excluded Liability:
The user is responsible for all changes and repairs made to the device by the user or the user’s agent.
All new components are to be provided by Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments.
Restrict repair to faulty components only.
Do not reuse faulty components.
Warning:
Cardboard shipping package provides limited humidity and moisture protection. This product can only function properly and safely if it is correctly transported, stored, installed, set up, operated, and maintained.
This product is intended for use in industrial areas. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference to several frequency based communications.
Note:
Always use product in accordance with specifications.
Copyright Siemens AG 2013. All Rights
Reserved
This document is available in bound version and in electronic version. We encourage users to purchase authorized bound manuals, or to view electronic versions as designed and authored by Siemens
Milltronics Process Instruments. Siemens Milltronics
Process Instruments will not be responsible for the contents of partial or whole reproductions of either bound or electronic versions.
Disclaimer of Liability
While we have verified the contents of this manual for agreement with the instrumentation described, variations remain possible. Thus we cannot guarantee full agreement. The contents of this manual are regularly reviewed and corrections are included in subsequent editions. We welcome all suggestions for improvement.
Technical data subject to change.
MILLTRONICS®is a registered trademark of Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments.
Contact SMPI Technical Publications at the following address:
European Authorized Representative
Publications
Siemens
Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments 76181 Karlsruhe
1954 Technology Drive, P.O. Box 4225
Peterborough, Ontario, Canada, K9J 7B1
Email: [email protected]
Deutschland
For a selection of Siemens Milltronics level measurement manuals, go to:
www. siemens.com/processautomation
. Under Process Instrumentation, select
Level
Measurement and then go to the manual archive listed under the product family.
For a selection of Siemens Milltronics weighing manuals, go to:
www. siemens.com/processautomation
. Under Weighing Technology, select
Continuous
Weighing Systems and then go to the manual archive listed under the product family.
©
Siemens AG 2013
Table of Contents
Table of Contents …………………………………………………………………………………………………i
Safety Notes ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….1
Safety marking symbols ………………………………………………………………………………………………1
FCC Conformity ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..1
CE Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Conformity ………………………………………………………….2
The Manual …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..2
Technical Support …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………3
SITRANS LR200 Overview ……………………………………………………………………………………5
Specifications ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..6
Power…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 6
Performance………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 6
Interface ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 7
Mechanical………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 7
Environmental ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 8
Process………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 9
Approvals …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 9
Programmer (infrared keypad) …………………………………………………………………………………. 11
Dimensions: Uni-Construction Polypropylene Rod Antenna ……………………………………………12
Installation …………………………………………………………………………………………………………14
Pressure Equipment Directive, PED, 97/23/EC …………………………………………………………………..15
Mounting location ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….15
Nozzle design ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………..15
Nozzle location …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..15
Orientation in a vessel with obstructions ………………………………………………………………….17
Mounting on a Stillpipe or Bypass Pipe ……………………………………………………………………17
Installation Instructions ………………………………………………………………………………………………………18
Wiring ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..19
Power …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..19
Connecting
SITRANS LR200 ……………………………………………………………………………………………….19
Wiring setups for hazardous area installations ………………………………………………………………..21
Intrinsically Safe wiring…………………………………………………………………………………………….. 21
Non-Sparking wiring ………………………………………………………………………………………………….23
Non-incendive wiring (FM US only) ………………………………………………………………………….23
Flameproof wiring ………………………………………………………………………………………………………23
Increased safety wiring ……………………………………………………………………………………………..24
Explosion-proof wiring (FM/CSA US/Canada only) ………………………………………………….24
Instructions specific to hazardous area installations ……………………………………………………….25
Operating via the handheld programmer …………………………………………………………..26
Activating SITRANS LR200 …………………………………………………………………………………………………26
The LCD Display …………………………………………………………………………………………………………26
Handheld Programmer ………………………………………………………………………………………………27
Programming SITRANS LR200 …………………………………………………………………………………..28
Quick Start Wizard via the handheld programmer ……………………………………………………………31
Auto False Echo Suppression …………………………………………………………………………………………….33
Requesting an Echo Profile ………………………………………………………………………………………………..33
i
Level application example ………………………………………………………………………………………………….34
Operating via SIMATIC PDM ……………………………………………………………………………..35
Functions in SIMATIC PDM ………………………………………………………………………………………………..35
Features of SIMATIC PDM Rev. 6.0, SP4 ………………………………………………………………….35
Features of SIMATIC PDM Rev. 5.2, SP1 ………………………………………………………………….36
Initial Setup ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….36
Deactivating Buffers …………………………………………………………………………………………………..36
Updating the Electronic Device Description (EDD) …………………………………………………..37
Configuring a new device ………………………………………………………………………………………….37
Quick Start Wizard via SIMATIC PDM ………………………………………………………………………………37
Linearization ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….41
Configuring a stillpipe application ……………………………………………………………………………..43
Changing parameter settings using SIMATIC PDM ………………………………………………………….44
Parameters accessed via pull-down menus ……………………………………………………………………..44
Echo Profile Utilities …………………………………………………………………………………………..45
Echo profile ………………………………………………………………………………………………………..46
TVT Shaper ………………………………………………………………………………………………………..47
Auto False Echo Suppression ………………………………………………………………………….48
Echo Setup …………………………………………………………………………………………………………50
Maintenance ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..50
Select Analog Output ………………………………………………………………………………………..51
Self Test ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………..51
Loop-Test ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………52
Configuration Flag Reset …………………………………………………………………………………..52
Master Reset ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..52
Wear …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..52
HART Communication ……………………………………………………………………………………….52
Diagnostics …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………52
Process Variables ……………………………………………………………………………………………..53
Trend ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….53
Device Status …………………………………………………………………………………………………….54
Update ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..54
Security ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….55
Operating via AMS Device Manager …………………………………………………………………56
Functions in AMS Device Manager …………………………………………………………………………………..56
Features of AMS Device Manager ……………………………………………………………………………56
Device Description (DD) …………………………………………………………………………………………….57
Configuring a new device ………………………………………………………………………………………….57
Startup ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..57
Master Reset ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..58
Pull-down menu access …………………………………………………………………………………………….58
Device configuration ………………………………………………………………………………………………….58
Quick Start Wizard via AMS Device Manager …………………………………………………………59
Quick Start …………………………………………………………………………………………………………59
Linearization ………………………………………………………………………………………………………60
Using Linearization via the Quick Start wizard ………………………………………………..60
Changing parameter settings using AMS Device Manager …………………………..61
Operation ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………61
Setup ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….62
Signal Processing ……………………………………………………………………………………………..63
ii
Signal Processing (continued) ………………………………………………………………………….64
Local Display ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..65
Maintenance and Diagnostics …………………………………………………………………………………………..65
Communication ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………66
Security ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….66
Device Diagnostics ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………..67
Process Variables ……………………………………………………………………………………………..67
Password Protection ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….68
User Manager utility …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..68
AMS Menu Structure …………………………………………………………………………………………………………69
Operating via FDT (Field Device Tool) ……………………………………………………………….73
Device Type Manager (DTM) …………………………………………………………………………………………….73
SITRANS DTM …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….73
The instrument EDD ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………73
Configuring a new device via FDT ……………………………………………………………………………………..73
Parameter Reference ………………………………………………………………………………………..75
Quick Start ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….75
Language ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………75
Material ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………..75
Response Rate …………………………………………………………………………………………………..75
Units ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………75
Operating Mode …………………………………………………………………………………………………76
Low Calibration Point ………………………………………………………………………………………..76
High Calibration Point ………………………………………………………………………………………..76
Apply? (Apply changes) …………………………………………………………………………………….76
Setup ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 76
Device ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..76
Sensor ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….76
Calibration ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….77
Rate …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….78
Fail-safe ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………..80
Analog Output Scaling ………………………………………………………………………………………81
Linearization ………………………………………………………………………………………………………83
Signal Processing ……………………………………………………………………………………………..87
Diagnostics ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 95
Echo Profile ………………………………………………………………………………………………………..95
Electronics Temperature …………………………………………………………………………………..96
Service……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 96
Master Reset ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..96
Remaining Device Lifetime ……………………………………………………………………………….97
Remaining Sensor Lifetime ……………………………………………………………………………..100
Service Schedule …………………………………………………………………………………………….103
Calibration Schedule ……………………………………………………………………………………….106
Manufacture Date ……………………………………………………………………………………………109
Powered Hours ………………………………………………………………………………………………..109
Power-on Resets ……………………………………………………………………………………………..109
LCD Fast Mode …………………………………………………………………………………………………110
LCD Contrast …………………………………………………………………………………………………….110
Memory Test ……………………………………………………………………………………………………110
Communication……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 111
iii
Device Address ………………………………………………………………………………………………..111
Security……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 111
Remote Access ………………………………………………………………………………………………..111
Local Access ……………………………………………………………………………………………………112
Language…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 112
Appendix A: Alphabetical Parameter List ……………………………………………………….113
Appendix B: Troubleshooting ………………………………………………………………………….115
Communication Troubleshooting ……………………………………………………………………………………..115
Device Status Icons ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….116
General Fault Codes ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….117
Operation Troubleshooting ……………………………………………………………………………………………….121
Appendix C: Maintenance ……………………………………………………………………………….123
Unit Repair and Excluded Liability ……………………………………………………………………………………123
Replacing the antenna ………………………………………………………………………………………………………123
Appendix D: Technical Reference …………………………………………………………………..124
Principles of Operation ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..124
Echo Processing ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….124
Process Intelligence …………………………………………………………………………………………………124
Echo Selection ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….125
Measurement Range ……………………………………………………………………………………………….129
Measurement Response ………………………………………………………………………………………….129
Analog Output ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………130
Sensor Mode …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….131
Current Output Function …………………………………………………………………………………………..131
Loss of Echo (LOE) ……………………………………………………………………………………………………132
Maximum Process Temperature Chart ……………………………………………………………………………133
Process Pressure/Temperature derating curves ……………………………………………………………134
Pressure Equipment Directive, PED, 97/23/EC ………………………………………………………..134
PTFE Rod Antenna ASME Hole Pattern, 150 lb ………………………………………………135
PTFE Rod Antenna, DN Hole Pattern, PN16 …………………………………………………..135
PTFE Rod Antenna Threaded Connection ………………………………………………………136
PTFE Rod Antenna Sanitary Connection ………………………………………………………..136
Horn Antenna or Waveguide, ASME Hole Pattern, 150 lb …………………………….137
Horn Antenna or Wave Guide DN Hole Pattern, PN16 ………………………………….137
PTFE Rod Antenna, DN Hole Pattern, PN16, PN40 ………………………………………..138
Horn Antenna or Waveguide, DN Hole Pattern, PN16, PN40 ……………………….138
Startup Behavior ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….139
Loop power ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..139
Typical Connection Drawing ……………………………………………………………………………………139
Allowable operating area of SITRANS LR200 …………………………………………………………139
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..140
Appendix E: Application Examples ………………………………………………………………….141
Liquid resin in storage vessel, level measurement ……………………………………………………….. 141
Horizontal vessel with volume measurement………………………………………………………………… 142
Sliding Waveguide on Anaerobic Digesters …………………………………………………………..144
Application with Stillpipe…………………………………………………………………………………………………. 146
Appendix F: HART Communications ……………………………………………………………….148
SIMATIC PDM …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..148
iv
HART Electronic Device Description (EDD) ……………………………………………………………………..148
HART Communicator 375 Menu Structure ………………………………………………………………………149
HART Version …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….151
Burst Mode ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….151
HART Multidrop Mode ……………………………………………………………………………………………..151
Appendix G: Flange Adapter Versions …………………………………………………………….152
Dimensions: ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….152
Threaded connection, PTFE Rod …………………………………………………………………………….152
PTFE Rod Antenna, Flat-Face Flange ………………………………………………………………………153
Threaded Connection, PTFE Rod, external shield …………………………………………………..154
Flat-Face Flange with Horn Antenna and Waveguide extension ………………………….155
Flanged Horn dimensions ………………………………………………………………………………………..156
Raised Face or Flat-Face Flange with Waveguide …………………………………………………157
Sliding Waveguide Configuration ……………………………………………………………………………158
Sanitary connection, Rod Antenna, PTFE or HDPE ………………………………………………..159
Raised-Face Flange per EN 1092-1 …………………………………………………………………………………..160
Raised-Face Flange Dimensions ……………………………………………………………………………..161
Flat-Face Flange (constant thickness series) ………………………………………………………………….162
Flat-Face Flange Dimensions …………………………………………………………………………………..163
Flange Mounting Instructions …………………………………………………………………………………………..165
Rod Assembly …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..166
Rod Extension Requirements …………………………………………………………………………………..166
Mounting Guidelines …………………………………………………………………………………………………………167
Appendix H: Firmware Revision History ………………………………………………………….169
Glossary …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..171
Index ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..175
LCD menu structure …………………………………………………………………………………………179
v
Notes
vi
Safety Notes
Special attention must be paid to warnings and notes highlighted from the rest of the text by grey boxes.
1)
WARNING: relates to a caution symbol on the product, and means that failure to observe the necessary precautions can result in death, serious injury, and/or considerable material damage.
WARNING
1)
: means that failure to observe the necessary precautions can result in death, serious injury, and/or considerable material damage.
Note:
means important information about the product or that part of the operating manual.
Safety marking symbols
In manual On product Description
Earth (ground) Terminal
Protective Conductor Terminal
(Label on product: yellow background.) WARNING: refer to accompanying documents (manual) for details.
FCC Conformity
US Installations only: Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
Siemens Milltronics could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Notes:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
• This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference to radio communications, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
1)
This symbol is used when there is no corresponding caution symbol on the product.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 1
CE Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Conformity
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the following EMC Standards:
EMC Standard Title
CISPR 11:2004/EN
55011:1998+A1:1999&A2:2002, CLASS B
Limits and methods of measurements of radio disturbance characteristics of industrial, scientific, and medical (ISM) radio-frequency equipment.
EN 61326:1997+A1:1998+A2:2001+A3:2003
(IEC 61326:2002)
Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control and
Laboratory Use – Electromagnetic Compatibility.
EN61000-4-2:2001
EN61000-4-3:2002
EN61000-4-4:2004
EN61000-4-5:2001
EN61000-4-6:2004
EN61000-4-8:2001
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Part 4-2:Testing and measurement techniques – Electrostatic discharge immunity test.
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Part 4-3: Testing and measurement techniques – Radiated, radiofrequency, electromagnetic field immunity test.
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Part 4-4: Testing and measurement techniques – Electrical fast transient/ burst immunity test.
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Part 4-5: Testing and measurement techniques – Surge immunity test.
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Part 4-6: Testing and measurement techniques – Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields.
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Part 4-8:
Testing and measurement techniques – Power frequency magnetic field immunity test.
The Manual
Notes:
• This product is intended for use in industrial areas. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference to several frequency based communications.
• Please follow the installation and operating procedures for a quick, trouble-free installation and to ensure the maximum accuracy and reliability of your SITRANS LR200.
• This manual applies to the SITRANS LR200 (HART) only.
This manual will help you set up your SITRANS LR200 for optimum performance. We always welcome suggestions and comments about manual content, design, and accessibility. Please direct your comments to [email protected]
For other Siemens Milltronics level measurement manuals, go to: www.siemens.com/level and look under Level Measurement.
Page 2 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Application Examples
The application examples used in this manual illustrate typical installations using
SITRANS LR200 (see
Appendix E: Application Examples
on page 141). Because there is
often a range of ways to approach an application, other configurations may also apply.
In all examples, substitute your own application details. If the examples do not apply to your application, check the applicable parameter reference for the available options.
Technical Support
Support is available 24 hours a day.
To find your local Siemens Automation Office address, phone number and fax number go to: www.siemens.com/automation/partner
• Click on the tab Contact, select Service, then click Service again to find your product group (+Automation Technology > +Sensor Systems >+Process
Instrumentation > +Level Measurement > +Continuous). Select Radar.
• Select the country followed by the City/Region.
• Select Technical Support.
For on-line technical support go to: www.siemens.com/automation/support-request
• Enter the device name (SITRANS LR200) or order number, then click on Search, and select the appropriate product type. Click on Next.
• You will be prompted to enter a keyword describing your issue. Then either browse the relevant documentation, or click on Next to email a detailed description of your issue to Siemens Technical Support staff.
Siemens IA/DT Technical Support Center: phone +49 (0)911 895 7222
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 3
Abbreviations and Identifications
dK
EDD
HART
I i
I o
IS
L i mH
F
s
PED pF ppm
PV
SV
TB
TVT
U i
U o
Short form Long Form
CE / FM / CSA
C i
D/A
Conformité Européenne / Factory Mutual /
Canadian Standards Association
Internal capacitance
Digital to analog
DCS Distributed Control System dielectric constant
Electronic Device Description
Highway Addressable Remote Transducer
Input current
Output current
Intrinsically Safe
Internal inductance milliHenry microFarad microsecond
Pressure Equipment Directive pico Farads parts per million
Primary Variable
Secondary Variable
Transducer Block
Time Varying Threshold
Input voltage
Output voltage
Description Units
safety approval control room apparatus
F mA mA safety approval
10
-3
10
-6
10
-6 safety approval
10
-12
F mH
H
F s measured value equivalent value sensitivity threshold
V
V
Page 4 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
SITRANS LR200 Overview
SITRANS LR200 is a 2-wire 6 GHz pulse radar level transmitter for continuous monitoring of liquids and slurries in storage vessels including high pressure and high temperature, to a range of 20 meters (66 feet). The instrument consists of an electronic component coupled to an antenna and either a threaded or flange type process connection.
SITRANS LR200 supports HART
1) management software options: communication protocol, and the following device
• SIMATIC PDM
• AMS Device Manager
Signals are processed using Process Intelligence which has been field-proven in over
1,000,000 applications worldwide (ultrasonic and radar).
shield length 250 mm (10″): use for long nozzles of 250 mm (10″) or less in length shield length: 100 mm (4″): use for nozzles of 100 mm (4″) or less in length
Programming
SITRANS LR200 is very easy to install and configure via a graphical local user interface
(LUI). You can modify the built in parameters either locally via the Siemens infrared handheld programmer, or from a remote location using one of the following options:
• SIMATIC PDM
• AMS Device Manager.
Applications
• liquids and slurries
• liquid bulk storage vessels
• simple process vessels with gentle agitation
Approvals and Certificates
SITRANS LR200 is available with General Purpose approval, or for hazardous areas. The approval rating is shown on the device nameplate. See also
Approvals on page 9.
Process Connections
A wide range of process connections and antenna options is available to suit virtually any vessel configuration.
1)
HART® is a registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 5
Specifications
Note:
Siemens Milltronics makes every attempt to ensure the accuracy of these specifications but reserves the right to change them at any time.
Power
General Purpose:
Intrinsically Safe:
Non-Sparking:
Non-incendive (FM/US only):
Flameproof:
Increased Safety:
Explosion-proof (FM/CSA US/Canada only):
• Maximum 30 V DC
• 4 to 20 mA
• Max. startup current
see on page 140
Nominal 24 V DC at max. 550 Ohm
Nominal 24 V DC at max. 250 Ohm
Performance
Reference operating conditions according to IEC 60770-1
• ambient temperature +15 to +25 °C (+59 to +77 °F)
• humidity
• ambient pressure
45% to 75% relative humidity
860 to 1060 mbar g (86000 to 106000 N/m
2 g)
Measurement Accuracy (measured in accordance with IEC 60770-1)
— From end of antenna to 600 mm (1.96 ft) 40 mm (1.57”)
— Remainder of Range 10 mm (0.4”) or 0.1% of span (whichever is greater)
Frequency 5.8 GHz (6.3 GHz in N. America): refer to device nameplate for confirmation
20 m (65.6 ft) Max. measurement range
1)
Min. detectable distance
1)
• 3″, 4″, and 6″ horn
2)
• 8″ horn
• PP rod, 100 mm internal shield
• PP rod, 250 mm internal shield
• PTFE rod, unshielded
• PTFE rod, 100 mm external shield
• PTFE rod, 250 mm external shield
300 mm (11.8″)
330 mm (12.9″)
417 mm (16.4″)
567 mm (22.3″)
417 mm (16.4″)
474 mm (18.6″)
624 mm (24.5″)
1)
2)
From sensor reference point. For the sensor reference point for each configura-
tion, see
Dimensions: Uni-Construction Polypropylene Rod Antenna
for the standard version, or other configurations.
on page 12
Appendix G: Flange Adapter Versions on page 152 for
3″ and 4″ horns should be used only in stillpipe applications.
Page 6 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Update time
1) minimum 1 second, depending on settings for
Response Rate (2.4.1.) and LCD Fast Mode (4.9.)
Influence of ambient temperature < 0.003%/K (average over full temperature range, referenced to maximum range)
Dielectric constant of material measured
• dK > 3 (for < 3 use waveguide antenna or stillpipe)
Memory:
• non-volatile EEPROM
• no battery required.
Interface
Analog output
• signal range
• fail signal
4 to 20 mA (
0.02 mA accuracy) upper limit 20 to 22.6 mA adjustable
3.6 mA to 22.6 mA (see
Fail-safe Mode on page 132
for more details)
Communication: HART
• Load
• Max. Line Length
• Protocol
Configuration
• remote
230 to 600 230 to 500 when connecting a coupling module multi-wire: 1500 m (4921 ft)
HART, Version 5.1
• local
Siemens SIMATIC PDM or AMS Device Manager
(PC)
Siemens infrared handheld programmer, or HART handheld communicator graphic LCD, with bar graph representing level Display (local)
2)
Mechanical
Process Connections:
• threaded connection
— polypropylene rod antenna 1.5” NPT (ANSI/ASME B1.20.1), R (BSPT, EN 10226-1) or G (BSPP, EN ISO 228-1)
— PTFE antenna, SS connection 2″ NPT (ANSI/ASME B1.20.1), R (BSPT, EN 10226-1) or
G (BSPP, EN ISO 228-1)
1)
2)
Reference conditions: Response Rate (2.4.1.) set to FAST, LCD Fast Mode (4.9.)
set to ON.
Display quality will be degraded in temperatures below –25 °C (–13 °F) and above
+65 °C (+149 °F).
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 7
• flange connection (flat-face)
materials
• flange connection (raised face)
materials
Antenna:
• polypropylene rod
• PTFE rod
• horns/waveguide
2″, 3″, 4″ (ASME 150 lb, 300 lb)
DN50, DN80, DN100, DN150, DN200 (PN16, PN40)
50A, 80A, 100A (JIS 10K)
316 L /1.4404 stainless steel or 316 L/1.4435 stainless steel
DN80, DN100, DN150 (PN16, PN40) per EN 1092-1 B1
DN200 (PN16) per EN 1092-1 B1
1.4404 or 1.4435 stainless steel hermetically sealed construction standard 100 mm (4″) shield for maximum 100 mm (4″) nozzle, or optional 250 mm (10″) long shield see
Appendix G: Flange Adapter Versions
on page
152 see
Appendix G: Flange Adapter Versions
on page
152
Enclosure
• construction
• conduit entry
• ingress protection aluminum, polyester powder-coated
2 x M20x1.5, or 2 x ½» NPT
Type 4X/NEMA 4X, Type 6/NEMA 6, IP 67, IP68 (see note below)
Weight (excluding extensions)
• 100 mm threaded polypropylene rod antenna
• DN50/PN16 or 2″ ASME 150 lb flat-face flange, rod or horn
• DN100/PN16 or 4″ ASME 150 lb flat-face flange, rod or horn
• DN200/PN16 or 8″ ASME 150 lb flat-face flange, rod or horn
• DN100/PN16 raised-face flange, rod or horn
• DN200/PN16 raised-face flange, rod or horn
Environmental
approx. 3.5 kg
(7.7 lb) approx. 8 kg
(17.6 lb) approx. 10.5 kg
(23.1 lb) approx. 19 kg
(41.8 lb) approx. 10 kg
(22 lb) approx. 20.8 kg
(45.9 lb)
Notes:
• Check
Approvals
on page 9, for the specific configuration you are about to use or
install.
• Use appropriate conduit seals to maintain IP or NEMA rating.
• location
• altitude indoor/ outdoor
5000 m (16,404 ft) max.
Page 8 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
• ambient temperature
• relative humidity
• installation category
• pollution degree
I
4
40 to +80 °C (40 to +176 °F) suitable for outdoor
Type 4X/NEMA 4X, Type 6/NEMA 6, IP67, IP68 enclosure (see note below)
Process
• process temperature
1)
— polypropylene rod
40 to +80 °C (40 to +176 °F)
— PTFE rod or SS horn
40 to +200 °C (40 to +392 °F)
• pressure (vessel)
1)
3 bar, gauge (43.5 psi, gauge)
Approvals
Note:
The device nameplate lists the approvals that apply to your device.
• General
• Radio
• Hazardous
CSA
US/C
, FM, CE, C-TICK
Europe (R&TTE), FCC, Industry Canada
Intrinsically Safe
2)
:
(Europe)
(International)
(US/Canada)
(Brazil)
(China)
Non-sparking
3)
(Europe)
(China)
ATEX II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
IECEx SIR 13.0006X, Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
FM/CSA:
Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D
Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G
Class III T4
INMETRO: DNV 12.0143 X
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
DNV #OCP 0017
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-0:2008,
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-11:2009 e
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-26:2008
NEPSI Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
ATEX II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
NEPSI Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
2)
3)
1)
The maximum temperature is dependent on the process connection, antenna materials,
and vessel pressure. For more detail, or for other configurations, see
Maximum Process
Temperature Chart
on page 133, and
Process Pressure/Temperature derating curves
on page 134 onwards.
See
Intrinsically Safe wiring
on page 21.
See
Non-Sparking wiring
on page 23 for more details.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 9
• Marine
Non-incendive
(US)
1)
Flameproof
(Europe)
2)
(China)
Increased Safety
(Europe)
3)
(China)
Explosion proof
(US/Canada)
4)
FM:
Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D T5
ATEX II 1/2 G Ex d mb ia IIC T4 Ga/Gb
NEPSI Ex d ia mb IIC T4 Ga/Gb
ATEX II 1/2 G Ex e mb ia IIC T4 Ga/Gb
NEPSI Ex e ia mb IIC T4 Ga/Gb
FM/CSA:
Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D
Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G
Class III T4
Lloyd’s Register of Shipping
ABS Type Approval
3)
4)
1)
2)
See
Non-incendive wiring (FM US only) on page 23.
See
Flameproof wiring
on page 23.
See
Increased safety wiring
on page 24.
See
Explosion-proof wiring (FM/CSA US/Canada only)
on page 24.
Page 10 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Programmer (infrared keypad)
Notes:
• Battery is non-replaceable with a lifetime expectancy of 10 years in normal use.
• To estimate the lifetime expectancy, check the nameplate on the back for the serial number. The first six numbers show the production date (mmddyy), for example, serial number 032608101V.
Siemens Milltronics Infrared IS (Intrinsically Safe) Handheld Programmer for hazardous and all other locations.
• approvals
• ambient temperature
• interface
• power
• weight
• color
• Part Number
FM/CSA Class I, II, III, Div. 1, Gr. A to G T6
CE
ATEX II 1GD Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
Ex iaD 20 T135 °C
FM/CSA Class I, II, III, Div. 1, Gr. A to G T6
IECEx SIR 09.0073 Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
Ex iaD 20 T135 °C
INMETRO DNV 12.0075
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
Ex ia IIIC T135 °C Da
DNV #OCP 0017
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-0:2008,
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-11:2009,
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-26:2008 e IEC 61241-11:2005
20 to +50 °C (5 to +122 °F) proprietary infrared pulse signal
3 V lithium battery
150 g (0.3 lb) black
7ML1930-1BK
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 11
Dimensions: Uni-Construction Polypropylene Rod
Antenna
50 mm
(2.0″)
½» NPT cable entry
(or alternatively, M20 cable gland) threaded cover
158 mm
(6.2″)
23 mm (0.9″) std. 296 mm (11.7″) min.
option 446 mm (17.6″) max.
154 mm
(6.1″) enclosure/ electronics locking ring sensor reference point process device tag mounting thread std. 575 mm (22.6″) min.
option 725 mm (28.5″) max.
polypropylene rod antenna with integral mounting thread and shield
1
1)
109 mm
(4.3″)
185 mm
(7.3″)
121 mm
(4.8″) shield length
(internal) std.: 100 mm (4″) option:
250 mm (10″)
1)
The shield is the area of the rod which is inactive. The shield length must be longer than the vessel nozzle height.
Page 12 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Threaded Connection Markings
Threaded connection markings are found on the flat face/faces of the process connection.
Serial number:a unique number allotted to each process connection, including the date of manufacture (MMDDYY) followed by a number from 001 to 999.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 13
Installation
WARNINGS:
• Handle the device using the enclosure, not the antenna or the device tag, to avoid damage.
• Installation shall only be performed by qualified personnel and in accordance with local governing regulations.
• SITRANS LR200 is to be used only in the manner outlined in this manual, otherwise protection provided by the device may be impaired.
• Never attempt to loosen, remove, or disassemble process connection or instrument housing while vessel contents are under pressure.
• Materials of construction are chosen based on their chemical compatibility (or inertness) for general purposes. For exposure to specific environments, check with chemical compatibility charts before installing.
• The user is responsible for the selection of bolting and gasket materials which will fall within the limits of the flange and its intended use and which are suitable for the service conditions.
• Improper installation may result in loss of process pressure.
1)
Notes:
• Refer to the device nameplate for approval information.
• The Process Device Tag shall remain with the process pressure boundary assembly
1
.
In the event the instrument package is replaced, the Process Device Tag shall be transferred to the replacement unit.
• SITRANS LR200 units are hydrostatically tested, meeting or exceeding the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and the European
Pressure Equipment Directive.
• The serial numbers stamped in each process connection body provide a unique identification number indicating date of manufacture.
Example: MMDDYY – XXX (where MM = month, DD = day, YY = year, and
XXX= sequential unit produced)
Further markings (space permitting) indicate flange configuration, size, pressure class, material, and material heat code.
1)
The process pressure boundary assembly comprises the components that act as a barrier against pressure loss from the process vessel: that is, the combination of process connection body and emitter, but normally excluding the electrical enclosure.
Page 14 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Pressure Equipment Directive, PED, 97/23/EC
Siemens Level Transmitters with flanged, threaded, or sanitary clamp type process mounts have no pressure-bearing housing of their own and, therefore, do not come under the Pressure Equipment Directive as pressure or safety accessories, (see EU Commission
Guideline 1/8).
Mounting location
Notes:
• Correct location is key to a successful application.
• Avoid reflective interference from vessel walls and obstructions by following the guidelines below
Nozzle design
Notes:
• For nozzles 100 mm (4″) in length or shorter use the 100 mm (4″) shield.
• For nozzles 250 mm (10″) in length or shorter use the 250 mm (10″) shield.
• For details on other applications, see
Appendix G: Flange Adapter Versions
on page
152.
• The end of the shield section should protrude a minimum of
10 mm (0.4”) to avoid false echoes being reflected from the nozzle.
locking ring secured by three
2 mm Allen set-screws threaded connection shield
10 mm
(0.4″)
Location on a manhole cover
• A manhole cover is typically a covered nozzle with a diameter 610 mm (24”) or greater.
• For optimum signal conditions, locate the antenna offcenter, typically 100 mm (4″) from the side.
Nozzle location
100 mm
(4″)
WARNING: For vessels with conical or parabolic tops, avoid mounting the instrument at the centre. (The concavity of the top can focus echoes into the centre, giving false readings.)
Note:
Under certain circumstances, it may be acceptable to mount SITRANS LR200 at the centre of a flat-topped tank: please discuss this with your Siemens Milltronics Representative.
• Avoid central locations on vessels preferred undesirable
Conical Flat Parabolic
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 15
Nozzle location (continued)
Beam angle
• Beam angle is the width of the cone where the energy density is half of the peak energy density.
• The peak energy density is directly in front of and in line with the rod antenna.
• There is a signal transmitted outside the beam angle, therefore false targets may be detected.
min. 300 mm (1ft) per 3 m (10’) of vessel height beam angle
28 o emission cone
Emission cone
• Keep emission cone free of interference from ladders, pipes, I-beams or filling streams.
• Locate the antenna away from the side wall, to avoid interference from indirect echoes.
• Make allowance for the emission cone spreading: allow a minimum of 300 mm (1 ft) for every 3 m (10 ft) of vessel height.
Environment
• Provide an environment suitable to the housing rating and materials of construction.
• Maintain ambient temperature within –40 to +80 °C (–40 to +176 °F)
1)
.
• Use a sunshield if the instrument will be exposed to direct sunlight.
Access for programming
• Provide easy access for viewing the display and programming via the handheld programmer.
2) ambient temperature (surrounding enclosure volume)
–40 to+ 80 °C (–40 to +176 °F) handheld programmer display process temperature (polypropylene rod
2
only)
–40 to 80 °C (–40 to 176 °F)
1)
2)
For more detail on maximum interface and process temperatures, see
Maximum Process
Temperature Chart
on page 133.
For other configurations, see
Maximum Process Temperature Chart
on page 133, and
Process Pressure/Temperature derating curves
on page 134.
Page 16 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Orientation in a vessel with obstructions
Polarization reference point
polarization axis polarization reference point
For best results on a vessel with obstructions, or a stillpipe with openings, orient the front or back of the device toward the obstructions (see
Mounting on a Stillpipe or Bypass Pipe
on page 17 for an illustration).
display
Mounting on a Stillpipe or Bypass Pipe
Note:
See
Device orientation
on page 18.
A stillpipe or bypass is used for products with a low dK
1)
, or when vortex or extremely turbulent conditions exist. It can also be used to provide optimum signal conditions on foaming materials.
Stillpipe or Bypass Pipe requirements
• The pipe diameter must be matched with the horn size. Use the largest horn size that will fit the stillpipe/bypass pipe (see
Flanged Horn dimensions on page 156).
• Suitable pipe diameters: 50 mm (2″) to 200 mm (8”).
•
• One continuous length of metallic pipe is preferred, without joints
2)
.
• Joints (if unavoidable) must be machined to ± 0.25 mm (± 0.010”) and must have a welded connecting sleeve on the outside.
Bypass vent required at the upper end of the bypass
3)
• Propagation factor.
depends on pipe diameter. See Propagation Factor
(2.8.3.) on page 87 for a table.
1)
2)
3)
See
Dielectric constant of material measured
on page 7.
Bad joints create reflections.
To equalize pressure and keep the liquid level in the bypass constant with the liquid level in the vessel.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 17
Device orientation
Bypass Installation vent align front or back of device with vents optimum diameter
80 mm (3”)
Stillpipe Installation align front or back of device with stillpipe slots slots
Installation Instructions
Notes:
• There is no limit to the number of times the device can be rotated without damage.
• When mounting, orient the front or back of the device towards the closest wall. For
an illustration of a stillpipe application see
Mounting on a Stillpipe or Bypass Pipe on page 17.
• Do not rotate the enclosure after programming and device configuration, otherwise an error may occur, caused by a polarity shift of the transmit pulse.
1.
Before inserting SITRANS LR200 into its mounting connection, check to ensure the threads are matching, to avoid damaging them.
2.
Simply screw SITRANS LR200 into the process connection, and hand tighten. For pressure applications, it will be necessary to use PTFE tape (or other appropriate thread sealing compound) and tighten the process connection beyond hand tight.
The maximum torque is 40 N·m (30 ft.lbs).
3.
If you want to rotate the enclosure, use a 2 mm Allen key to loosen the set-screws that secure the locking ring
1)
.
4.
Once the enclosure is in a suitable position, tighten the set-screws. locking ring
1 over threaded connection; secured by 3
2 mm Allen setscrews
1)
When the locking ring is secured, it prevents the enclosure rotating on the threaded connection.
Page 18 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Wiring
Power
WARNINGS:
The DC input terminals shall be supplied from a source providing electrical isolation between the input and output, in order to meet the applicable safety requirements of IEC 61010-1.
All field wiring must have insulation suitable for rated voltages.
Connecting SITRANS LR200
1) 2)
WARNINGS:
• Check the nameplate on your instrument, to verify the approval rating.
• Use appropriate conduit seals to maintain IP or NEMA rating.
•
See
Wiring setups for hazardous area installations on page 21.
Notes:
• Use twisted pair cable: AWG 22 to 14 (0.34 mm
2
to 2.5 mm
2
).
• Separate cables and conduits may be required to conform to standard instrumentation wiring practices or electrical codes.
Use a 2 mm Allen key to loosen the lid-lock set screw.
If you want to rotate the enclosure, use the 2 mm
Allen key to loosen the locking ring.
plug (IP 68) locking ring threaded connection
optional cable gland
1) 2)
(or NPT cable entry
2)
)
1) Strip the cable jacket for approximately 70 mm (2.75″) from the end of the cable, and thread the wires through the gland
2)
.
1)
2)
May be shipped with the device.
If cable is routed through conduit, use only approved suitable-size hubs for waterproof applications.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 19
2) Connect the wires to the terminals as shown: the polarity is identified on the terminal block.
3) Ground the instrument according to local regulations.
4) Tighten the gland to form a good seal.
5) Close the lid and secure the locking ring before programming and device configuration cable shield
(if used)
Connecting HART
Typical PLC/mA configuration with HART
Notes
• Depending on the system design, the power supply may be separate from the PLC, or integral to it.
• HART resistance (total of loop resistance, that is, cable resistance plus 250 Ohm
[resistor]) must be limited according to the allowable operating area as shown in either
Curve 1 (General Purpose, Intrinsically Safe, Non-Sparking, Non-incendive)
on page 139 or
Curve 2 (Flameproof, Increased Safety, Explosion-proof) on page
140.
• Do not connect more than one HART programming device at a time.
power supply
SITRANS LR200
R = 250 active PLC
HART modem
HART communicator
Page 20 SITRANS LR200 (HART) –OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Wiring setups for hazardous area installations
There are six wiring options for hazardous area installations.
In all cases, check the nameplate on your instrument, and confirm the approval rating.
1. Intrinsically Safe wiring
Device nameplate (ATEX/IECEX/INMETRO/C-TICK)
SITRANS LR200
7MLxxxx-xxxxx-xxxx
Serial No: GYZ / S1034567
Encl.: NEMA / TYPE 4X, 6, IP67, IP68
Amb.Temp.: – 40°C to 80°C
5.8 GHz
HART
Max., 4 — 20 mA Power Rating: 24 V Nom., 30 V
Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments, Peterborough
Assembled in Canada with domestic and imported parts
KCC-REM-S49
SITRANSLR
II 1 G
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
SIRA 06ATEX2378X
IECEx SIR 13.0006X
Ui = 30 V
Ii = 120 mA
Pi = 0.8 W
Ci = 15 nF
Li = 0.1 mH
OCP 0017
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
DNV 12.0143 X
ATENÇÃO — RISCO POTENCIAL DE CARGA ELETROSTÁTICA — VEJA INSTRUÇÕES
The ATEX certificate can be downloaded from the product page of our website at: www.siemens.com/LR200. Go to Support > Approvals / Certificates.
The IECEx certificate listed on the nameplate can be viewed on the IECEx website. Go to: http://iecex.iec.ch and click on Ex Equipment Certificates of Conformity then enter the certificate number IECEx SIR 13.0006X.
Device nameplate (FM/CSA)
FM Intrinsically Safe connection drawing number A5E01003040 and CSA Intrinsically Safe connection drawing number A5E01003039 can be downloaded from the product page of our website at: www.siemens.com/LR200. Go to Support > Installation Drawings > Level Measurement > Continuous — Radar.
•
For power demands see
Curve 1 (General Purpose, Intrinsically Safe, Non-Sparking,
Non-incendive) on page 139.
• For wiring requirements: follow local regulations.
• Approved dust-tight and water-tight conduit seals are required for outdoor
NEMA 4X / type 4X / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68 locations.
•
Refer to
Instructions specific to hazardous area installations on page 25.
• Recommended intrinsically safe barriers are listed under
Passive Shunt Diode
Barriers on page 22 and Active barriers (repeating barriers) on page 22.
Note: Selecting a suitable PLC input module, power supply, or barrier requires knowledge about Intrinsic Safety and the application. It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure that the intrinsically safe installation complies with both the apparatus approval requirements and the relevant national code of practice.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 21
Passive Shunt Diode Barriers
Note: A well regulated supply voltage is required.
Manufacturer
MTL
MTL
Stahl
Stahl
Part Number
787SP+ (Dual Channel)
7787P+ (Dual Channel)
9001/01-280-100-10 (Single Channel)
9002/01-280-110-10 (Dual Channel)
How to select a passive barrier for SITRANS LR200
To make sure that the barrier safety description is suitable for the LR200 Intrinsically Safe
(IS) input parameters, carry out the following calculations:
Re-e = max. end-to-end resistance of the barrier
Rloop = loop resistance (total of cable resistance plus any additional series resistance, for example, PLC inputs and/or displays)
Vbarrier = value of any non-linear voltage drops due to the barrier
1) Determine the value for Re-e from the data sheet.
2) Calculate the total value for Rloop.
3) Calculate Rworking = Re-e + Rloop.
4) Determine the value of Vbarrier from the barrier data sheet (for example, voltage drops due to diodes).
5) Calculate Vworking = Vsupply – Vbarrier.
Use the values for Vworking and Rworking to confirm that operation is within the
shaded area of the graph
Curve 1 (General Purpose, Intrinsically Safe, Non-Sparking, Non-incendive) on page 139.
Active barriers (repeating barriers)
Manufacturer
MTL
MTL
Siemens
Stahl
MTL
MTL
Part Number
706
7206
SITRANS I 7NG4122
9001/51-280-110-14
E02009
E02010
Page 22 SITRANS LR200 (HART) –OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
2. Non-Sparking wiring
SITRANS LR200
7MLxxxx-xxxxx-xxxx
Serial No: GYZ / A1034567
Encl.: NEMA / TYPE 4X, 6, IP67, IP68
Amb.Temp.: – 40°C to 80°C
Power Rating: 24 V Nom., 30 V
5.8 GHz
Max., 4 – 20 mA
Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments, Peterborough
Assembled in Canada with domestic and imported parts
HART
II
3 G
Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
SIRA 09ATEX4151X
WARNING: Use Cable Rated > 100°C
0682
The ATEX certificate listed on the nameplate can be downloaded from the product page of our website at: www.siemens.com/LR200.
Go to: Support > Approvals / Certificates.
• For power demands see
Curve 1 (General Purpose, Intrinsically Safe, Non-Sparking, Nonincendive) on page 139.
• For wiring requirements follow local regulations.
• Refer to
Instructions specific to hazardous area installations on page 25.
3. Non-incendive wiring (FM US only)
FM Class 1, Div 2 connection drawing number
23650537 can be downloaded from the product page of our website at: www.siemens.com/LR200. Go to Support > Installation Drawings > Level Measurement >
Continuous — Radar.
•
For power demands see
Curve 1 (General Purpose, Intrinsically Safe, Non-Sparking,
Non-incendive) on page 139.
4. Flameproof wiring
SITRANS LR200
7MLxxxx-xxxxx-xxxx-x
Serial No.: GYZ-A1034567
Encl.: NEMA / TYPE 4X, 6, IP67, IP68
5.8 GHz
Amb. Temp.: – 40°C to 80°C
Power Rating: 24 V Nom., 30 V Max., 4 – 20 mA
Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments, Peterborough
Assembled in Canada with domestic and imported parts
HART
II 1/2 G
Ex d mb ia IIC T4 Ga/Gb
SIRA 05ATEX1001X
Um = 250 V
0682
0518
WARNING: De-Energize Before Removing Cover
Use Cable Rated > 100°C
KCC-REM-S49
SITRANSLR
The ATEX certificate can be downloaded from the product page of our website at: www.siemens.com/LR200. Go to Support >
Approvals / Certificates.
• For power demands see
Curve 2 (Flameproof, Increased Safety, Explosion-proof) on page 140.
• For wiring requirements follow local regulations.
•
Refer to
Instructions specific to hazardous area installations on page 25.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 23
5. Increased safety wiring
SITRANS LR200
7MLxxxx-xxxxx-xxxx-x
Serial No.: GYZ-A1034567
Encl.: NEMA / TYPE 4X, 6, IP67, IP68
Amb. Temp.: – 40°C to 80°C
Power Rating: 24 V Nom., 30 V
5.8 GHz
Max., 4 – 20 mA
Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments, Peterborough
Assembled in Canada with domestic and imported parts
HART
II 1/2 G
Ex e mb ia IIC T4 Ga/Gb
SIRA 05ATEX1001X
Um = 250 V
0682
0518
WARNING: De-Energize Before Removing Cover
Use Cable Rated > 100°C
KCC-REM-S49
SITRANSLR
The ATEX certificate can be downloaded from the product page of our website at: www.siemens.com/LR200. Go to Support >
Approvals / Certificates.
• For power demands see
Curve 2 (Flameproof, Increased Safety, Explosion-proof) on page 140.
• For wiring requirements follow local regulations.
•
Refer to
Instructions specific to hazardous area installations on page 25.
6. Explosion-proof wiring (FM/CSA US/Canada only)
FM/CSA Explosion Proof connection drawing number 23650597 can be downloaded from the product page of our website at: www.siemens.com/LR200. Go to Support > Installation Drawings > Level Measurement >
Continuous — Radar.
• For power demands see
page 140.
Curve 2 (Flameproof, Increased Safety, Explosion-proof) on
• For wiring requirements (North America only) see the connection drawing listed above.
Page 24 SITRANS LR200 (HART) –OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Instructions specific to hazardous area installations
(Reference European ATEX Directive 94/9/EC,
Annex II, 1/0/6)
The following instructions apply to equipment covered by certificate numbers
SIRA 06ATEX2378X, SIRA 05ATEX1001X, and SIRA 09ATEX4151X:
1) For use and assembly, refer to the main instructions.
2) The equipment is certified for use as Category 1G equipment per
SIRA 06ATEX2378X, Category 1/2 equipment per SIRA 05ATEX1001X, and Category
3G equipment per SIRA 09ATEX4151X.
3) The equipment may be used with flammable gases and vapors with apparatus group
IIC, IIB, and IIA, and temperature classes T1, T2, T3, and T4.
4) The equipment is certified for use in an ambient temperature range of –40 C to
+80 C.
5) The equipment has not been assessed as a safety related device (as referred to by
Directive 94/9/EC Annex II, clause 1.5).
6) Installation and inspection of this equipment shall be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with the applicable code of practice (EN 60079-14 and
EN 60079-17 in Europe).
7) The equipment is non-repairable.
The certificate numbers have an ‘X’ suffix, which indicates that special conditions for safe use apply. Those installing or inspecting this equipment must have access to the certificates.)
9) If the equipment is likely to come into contact with aggressive substances, then it is the responsibility of the user to take suitable precautions that prevent it from being adversely affected, thus ensuring that the type of protection is not compromised.
Aggressive substances :e.g. acidic liquids or gases that may attack metals,
Suitable precautions: or solvents that may affect polymeric materials.
e.g. establishing from the material’s data sheet that it is resistant to specific chemicals.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 25
Operating via the handheld programmer
SITRANS LR200 carries out its level measurement tasks according to settings made via parameters. The settings can be modified locally via the Local User Interface (LUI) which consists of an LCD display and a handheld programmer.
A Quick Start Wizard provides an easy step-by-step procedure to configure the device for a simple application. There are two ways to access the wizard:
• locally (see
Quick Start Wizard via the handheld programmer on page 31)
• from a remote location (see
Quick Start Wizard via SIMATIC PDM
on page 37,
or
Quick Start Wizard via AMS Device Manager
on page 59
For more complex setups see
Appendix E: Application Examples
on page 141, and for the
complete range of parameters see
Parameter Reference
on page 75.
Activating SITRANS LR200
Power up the instrument. SITRANS LR200 automatically starts up in Measurement mode.
A transition screen showing the current firmware revision and an incrementing line of stars is displayed while the first measurement is being processed.
Press Mode to toggle between Measurement and Program Mode.
1) 2)
The LCD Display
Measurement mode display
Normal operation
1
8 7
2 3 4
6 5
1 – toggle indicator
1)
for linear units or %
2 – selected operation: level, volume, space, or distance
3 – measured value (level or volume, space, or distance)
4 – units
5 – bar graph indicates level
6 – secondary region indicates on request
2)
electronics temperature, echo confidence, loop current, or distance
7 – text area displays status messages
8 – device status indicator (see
Device Status Icons
on page 116)
Fault present
S: 0 LOE
7 – text area displays a fault code and an error message
8 – service required icon appears
1)
2)
Press UP or DOWN arrow to switch.
In response to a key press request. For details, see
Key functions in Measurement mode
on page 27.
Page 26 SITRANS LR200 HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
PROGRAM mode display
Navigation view
• A visible menu bar indicates the menu list is too long to display all items.
• A band halfway down the menu bar indicates the current item is halfway down the list.
current menu menu bar item band current item number current item
• The depth and relative position of the item band on the menu bar indicates the length of the menu list, and approximate position of the current item in the list.
• A deeper band indicates fewer items.
Parameter view Edit view
parameter name parameter number parameter value/ selection
Handheld Programmer
(Part No. 7ML1930-1BK)
The programmer is ordered separately.
C
Key functions in Measurement mode
Key Function Result
Updates the loop current.
Updates internal enclosure temperature reading.
New value is displayed in LCD secondary region.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 27
Key Function
Updates echo confidence value.
Result (cont’d)
Updates distance measurement.
New value is displayed in LCD secondary region.
Mode opens PROGRAM mode.
Opens the menu level last displayed in this power cycle, unless power has been cycled since exiting PROGRAM mode or more than 10 minutes have elapsed since PROGRAM mode was used.
Then top level menu will be displayed.
RIGHT arrow opens PROGRAM mode.
Opens the top level menu.
UP or DOWN arrow toggles between linear units and percent.
LCD displays measured value in either linear units or percent.
Programming SITRANS LR200
Notes:
• While the device is in PROGRAM mode the output remains fixed and does not respond to changes in the device.
• SITRANS LR200 automatically returns to Measurement mode after a period of inactivity in PROGRAM mode (between 15 seconds and 10 minutes, depending on the menu level).
Change parameter settings and set operating conditions to suit your specific application.
(For remote operation see
Operating via SIMATIC PDM
Device Manager
on page 56.)
on page 35 or Operating via AMS
Parameter menus
Note: For the complete list of parameters with instructions, see on page 75.
Parameter Reference
Parameters are identified by name and organized into function groups (see
LCD menu structure
on page 179).
1. QUICK START
2. SETUP
………….
2.7. LINEARIZATION
2.7.1. VOLUME
2.7.1.1. VESSEL SHAPE
Page 28 SITRANS LR200 HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
1. Enter PROGRAM mode
• Point the programmer at the display from a maximum distance of 300 mm (1 ft).
handheld programmer display
• RIGHT arrow activates PROGRAM mode and opens menu level 1.
Max. 300 mm
(1 ft)
• Mode opens the menu level last displayed in PROGRAM mode within the last
10 minutes, or menu level 1 if power has been cycled since then.
2. Navigating: key functions in Navigation mode
Notes:
• In Navigation mode ARROW keys move to the next menu item in the direction of the arrow.
• For Quick Access to parameters via the handheld programmer, press Home then enter the menu number, for example:
2.7.1
(Volume).
,
Key Name
UP or DOWN arrow
Menu level
RIGHT arrow menu parameter
Function
Go to first parameter in the selected menu, or open next menu.
Open Edit mode.
LEFT arrow menu or parameter Open parent menu.
Mode
Home menu or parameter Change to MEASUREMENT mode.
menu or parameter Open top level menu: menu 1.
3. Editing in PROGRAM mode
Selecting a listed option
a) Navigate to the desired parameter.
b) Press RIGHT arrow view.
to open parameter parameter name parameter number current selection
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 29
c) Press RIGHT arrow again to open Edit mode. The current selection is highlighted.
Scroll to a new selection.
d) Press RIGHT arrow to accept it
The LCD returns to parameter view and displays the new selection.
Changing a numeric value
a) Navigate to the desired parameter.
b) Press RIGHT arrow to open parameter view. The current value is displayed.
c) Press RIGHT arrow again to open Edit mode. The current value is highlighted.
d) Key in a new value.
e) Press RIGHT arrow to accept it. The
LCD returns to parameter view and displays the new selection.
parameter name parameter number current value
Key functions in Edit mode
Key Name
UP or
DOWN arrow
RIGHT arrow
LEFT arrow
:
Function
Selecting options
Numeric editing
Selecting options
Numeric editing
Selecting options
Numeric editing
Scrolls to item.
— Increments or decrements digits
— Toggles plus and minus sign
— Accepts the data (writes the parameter)
— Changes from Edit to Navigation mode
— Moves cursor one space to the right
— or with cursor on Enter sign, accepts the data and changes from Edit to Navigation mode
Cancels Edit mode without changing the parameter
— Moves cursor to plus/minus sign if this is the first key pressed
— or moves cursor one space to the left.
Page 30 SITRANS LR200 HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Key Name
C
Clear
Decimal point
Plus or minus sign
Function (cont’d)
Erases the display.
Numeric editing
Enters a decimal point.
Changes the sign of the entered value.
to Numeral Enters the corresponding character.
Quick Start Wizard via the handheld programmer
Notes:
• The Quick Start wizard settings are inter-related and changes apply only after you
select YES in Apply? (Apply changes) (1.8.).
• Do not use the Quick Start wizard to modify individual parameters: see instead
Parameter Reference
on page 75.
a) Point the programmer at the display from a maximum distance of 300 mm (1 ft), then press RIGHT arrow to activate PROGRAM mode and open menu level 1. b) Press RIGHT arrow twice to navigate to menu item 1.1 and open parameter view. c) Press RIGHT arrow to open Edit mode or DOWN arrow to accept default values and move directly to the next item.
d) To change a setting, scroll to the desired item or key in a new value.
e) After modifying a value, press RIGHT arrow to accept it and press DOWN arrow to move to the next item.
1.1. Language
Selects the language to be used on the LCD and takes effect immediately.
Options
English, Deutsch, Français, Español
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 31
1.2. Material
Selects the appropriate echo processing algorithms for the material (see Position
Detect (2.8.4.2.) on page 88 for more detail).
Options
LIQUID
LIQUID LOW DK a)
(low dielectric liquid – CLEF algorithm enabled
) a) dK < 3.0
1.3. Response Rate
Sets the reaction speed of the device to measurement changes in the target range.
Options
Response Rate (2.4.1.)
Fill Rate (2.4.2.)/Empty rate (2.4.3.)
SLOW
MED
FAST
0.1 m/min (0.32 ft/min)
1.0 m/min (3.28 ft/min)
10.0 m/min (32.8 ft/min)
Use a setting just faster than the maximum filling or emptying rate (whichever is greater).
1.4. Units
Sensor measurement units.
Options
M, CM, MM, FT, IN
1.5. Operating Mode
sensor reference point
1)
Distance
Space
High Cal. Point
(process full level)
Level
Low Cal. Point
(process empty level) a)
1)
Operating
Mode
Description
NO
SERVICE
Measurement and associated loop current are not updated, and the device defaults to Fail-safe mode a)
.
LEVEL
SPACE
DISTANCE
Distance to material surface
See Material Level (2.5.1.) on page 80 for more detail.
Reference point
Low Calibration Point
High Calibration Point
Sensor Reference Point
1)
The point from which High and Low Calibration points are referenced: see
Dimensions: Uni-Construction Polypropylene Rod Antenna on page 12 and
Appendix G:
Flange Adapter Versions
on page 152.
Page 32 SITRANS LR200 HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
1.6. Low Calibration Point
Distance from Sensor Reference to Low Calibration Point: usually process empty
level. (See Operating Mode (1.5.) for an illustration.)
Values
Range: 0.00 to 20.00 m
1.7. High Calibration Point
Distance from Sensor Reference to High Calibration Point: usually process full level.
(See Operating Mode (1.5.) for an illustration.)
Values
Range: 0.00 to 20.00 m
1.8. Apply? (Apply changes)
In order to save the Quick Start settings it is necessary to select Yes to apply changes.
Options
YES, NO, DONE (Display shows DONE when Quick Start is successfully completed.)
Press Mode to return to Measurement mode. SITRANS LR200 is now ready to operate.
Auto False Echo Suppression
If you have a vessel with known obstructions, we recommend using Auto False Echo
Suppression to prevent false echo detection. See TVT setup (2.8.7.) on page 92 for
instructions.
This feature can also be used if SITRANS LR200 displays a false high level, or the reading is fluctuating between the correct level and a false high level.
Requesting an Echo Profile
• In PROGRAM mode, navigate to: Level Meter
> Diagnostics (3.) > Echo Profile (3.1.)
• Press RIGHT arrow to request a profile.
• UP/DOWN arrows are dedicated to scrolling through the icons.
• The selected icon is highlighted.
• Press UP arrow to select Measure and
RIGHT arrow to update the profile.
• Press DOWN arrow to select Exit then press RIGHT arrow to return to the previous menu. confidence algorithm: tF distance echo
TVT exit icon selected / highlighted measure exit exit icon deselected
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 33
Level application example
The application is a vessel that takes an average 3 hours (180 minutes) to fill and 3 weeks to empty.
Fill rate = 0.08 m/minute [(Low Cal Pt. minus High Cal Pt.) / fastest of fill or empty time]
= (15.5 m – 1 m) / 180 min.
= 14.5 m /180 min. = 0.08 m/min.
SITRANS LR200
1.0 m
Sensor
Reference
Point
High
Cal.
Point
15.5 m
Level
14.5
Low
Calibration
Point
Quick Start Parameter Setting Description
Material (1.2.)
Response Rate (1.3.)
Units (1.4.)
Operating Mode (1.5.)
Low Calibration Point (1.6.)
High Calibration Point (1.7.)
Apply? (Apply changes) (1.8.)
LIQUID
SLOW m
LEVEL
15.5
1.0
YES
Response rate = 0.1 m/minute.
Material level referenced from Low Cal. Point.
Process empty level.
Process full level.
Save new settings.
Page 34 SITRANS LR200 HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Operating via SIMATIC PDM
SIMATIC PDM is a software package used to commission and maintain SITRANS LR200 and other process devices. Please consult the operating instructions or online help for details on using SIMATIC PDM. (You can find more information at www.siemens.com/simatic-pdm.)
Functions in SIMATIC PDM
Notes:
• For a complete list of parameters see
Parameter Reference
on page 75.
• While the device is in PROGRAM mode the output remains fixed and does not respond to changes in the device.
SIMATIC PDM monitors the process values, alarms and status signals of the device. It allows you to display, compare, adjust, verify, and simulate process device data; also to set schedules for calibration and maintenance.
Parameters are identified by name and organized into function groups. See structure
on page 179 for a chart
1)
PDM
on page 44 for more details.
and
LCD menu
Changing parameter settings using SIMATIC
See
Parameters accessed via pull-down menus
appear in the menu structure in SIMATIC PDM.
on page 44 for parameters that do not
Features of SIMATIC PDM Rev. 6.0, SP4
The graphic interface in SITRANS LR200 makes monitoring and adjustments easy.
Feature page Function
Quick Start 38
Device configuration for simple applications
Echo Profile Utilities 45
Easy access to echo profile viewing/comparison,
TVT shaping, auto false echo suppression and echo setup
Auto False Echo Suppression 48
Screen out false echoes
TVT Shaper 47
Manual TVT adjustment
Linearization 41
Volume
Process Variables 53
Monitor process variables and level trend
Enter a new password and re-enter it in the Confirmation window. Click on OK. 55
Protect security and communication parameters from modification by the maintenance user
1)
The menu structure for SIMATIC PDM is almost identical to that for the LCD.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 35
Features of SIMATIC PDM Rev. 5.2, SP1
SIMATIC PDM Rev. 5.2 SP1 is supported only for basic configuration and troubleshooting. For advanced features such as the Quick Start wizard, Rev. 6.0 SP3 HF2 or higher is required.
Initial Setup
To ensure that SIMATIC PDM connects properly, please complete the two processes outlined below:
1) De-activating Buffers
2) Updating the Electronic Device Description (EDD)
Deactivating Buffers
This deactivation is required to align SIMATIC PDM with the HART modem for Windows
2000
1)
and Windows
®
XP operating Systems.
Notes:
• SIMATIC PDM operates only in the Windows XP Professional version, not in the
Home version.
• You need administrative rights on your operating system to deactivate buffers.
1) Click Start/Settings/Control Panel to begin configuration.
2) Double click System, select the Hardware tab, and click the Device Manager button.
3) Open Ports folder and double click the COM Port used by the system to open the
Communications Port Properties window.
4) Select the Port Settings tab and double click the Advanced button.
5) If the Use FIFO buffers radio box is selected, click to deselect.
Deselect Use
FIFO buffers radio box
6)
Click OK to close out. Close all screens and then reboot.
1)
Page 36
Windows is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation
SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Updating the Electronic Device Description (EDD)
You can locate the EDD in Device Catalog, under Sensors/Level/Echo/Siemens Milltronics/
SITRANS LR200. Check the product page of our website at: www.siemens.com/LR200 to make sure you have the latest version of SIMATIC PDM, the most recent Service Pack (SP) and the most recent hot fix (HF). Go to Support > Software Downloads.
To install a new EDD:
1) Download the EDD from the product page of our website at www.siemens.com/
LR200 and save the files to your computer.
2) Extract the zipped file to an easily accessed location.
3) Launch SIMATIC PDM – Manage Device Catalog, browse to the unzipped EDD file and select it.
Configuring a new device
Note: Clicking on Cancel during an upload from device to SIMATIC PDM will result in some parameters being updated.
1) Check that you have the most recent EDD and if necessary update it (see
Updating the Electronic Device Description (EDD)
on page 37).
2) Launch SIMATIC Manager and create a new project for LR200. Application Guides for setting up HART devices with SIMATIC PDM can be downloaded from the product page of our website at: www.siemens.com/LR200.
3) Open the menu Device – Master Reset and click on OK to perform a reset to Factory
Defaults.
4) After the reset is complete upload parameters to the PC/PG.
5) Configure the device via the Quick Start wizard.
Quick Start Wizard via SIMATIC PDM
The graphic Quick Start Wizard provides an easy 5-step procedure that configures the device for a simple application.
Please consult the operating instructions or online help for details on using
SIMATIC PDM.
1) If you have not already done so, check that you have the most up-to-date EDD for your instrument. (See
Updating the Electronic Device Description (EDD)
above.)
2) Launch SIMATIC Manager and create a new project for LR200. (Application Guides for setting up HART and PROFIBUS PA devices with SIMATIC PDM can be downloaded from the product page of our website at: www.siemens.com/LR200).
3) Open the menu Device – Master Reset and click on OK to perform a reset to Factory
Defaults.
4) After the reset is complete upload parameters to the PC/PG.
5) Configure the device.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 37
Quick Start
Notes:
• The Quick Start wizard settings are inter-related and changes apply only after you click on FINISH AND DOWNLOAD at the end of step 5 to save settings offline and transfer them to the device.
• Do not use the Quick Start Wizard to modify individual parameters. For quick access to echo profile parameters see
Echo Setup
on page 50, or see
Parameter Reference on page 75 for a complete list.
• Click on BACK to return and revise settings or CANCEL to exit the Quick Start.
• For a vessel with obstructions see
Auto False Echo Suppression
on page 48.
Launch SIMATIC PDM, open the menu Device – Wizard — Quick Start, and follow steps 1 to 5.
Quick
Start
Step 1 – Identification
Note: The layout of the dialog boxes shown may vary according to the resolution setting for your computer monitor.
1) Click on Read Data from Device to upload Quick Start parameter settings from the device to the PC/PG and ensure PDM is synchronized with the device.
2) If required, change the language for the local user interface.
3) Click on NEXT to accept the default values. (Description, Message, and Installation
Date fields can be left blank.)
Page 38 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Step 2 – Application
Select the application type (level or volume) and the material
1)
, then click on NEXT.
Step 3 – Vessel Shape
The vessel shapes shown are predefined. To describe a more complex
shape see
Using Linearization via the
Quick Start wizard on page 41.
For a vessel with obstructions, see
Auto
False Echo Suppression on page 48
Select the vessel shape, and click on
NEXT.
1)
See
Application with Stillpipe
on page 146 for a Low Dielectric Liquid application.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 39
Step 4 – Range
Set the parameters, and click on NEXT.
Step 5 – Summary
Check parameter settings, and click on BACK to return and revise values, FINISH to save settings offline, or FINISH AND DOWNLOAD to save settings offline and transfer them to the device.
The message Quick Start was successful will appear. Click on OK.
Page 40 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Linearization
You can use the linearization feature to define a more complex vessel shape and enter up to 32 level breakpoints where the corresponding volume is known. The values corresponding to 100% and 0% levels must be entered. The breakpoints can be ordered from top to bottom, or the reverse.
3
2
Example (values for example purposes only)
Breakpoint number
4
Level value
19.5
Breakpoint no.
Level value
(m)
1
9
5
0
1
2
3
4
0
5
9
19.5
Volume value
(l)
0
500
3000
8000
20 m
0.5 m
Using Linearization via the Quick Start wizard
Open the menu Device – Wizard — Quick Start:
1) In Step 1 – Identification, click on Read Data from Device, select language, and click on Next.
2) In Step 2 – Application, select a volume application, for example Volume in a vessel, and click on Next.
3) In Step 3 – Vessel Shape, choose the vessel shape option Linearization Table, and click on Next.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 41
4) In Step 4 – Ranges
Linearization a) Enter parameter values.
b) Click on Linearization.
c) In the Linearization window click on the appropriate Breakpoint tab to open the dialog window.
d) Enter the desired level and associated volume values
1)
, and click on OK.
Breakpoints 1 — 8
Note: The Reset button resets values to the values in the offline table.
e) In the Step 4 window, click on NEXT.
1)
For display purposes we recommend entering values in ascending order (that is, the lowest values in level 1 and volume 1).
Page 42 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
5) In Step 5 – Summary, check parameter values. Click on BACK to return and revise values, FINISH to save settings offline, or FINISH AND DOWNLOAD to save settings offline and transfer them to the device.
The message Quick Start was successful will appear. Click on OK.
Configuring a stillpipe application
• Launch the Quick Start wizard and follow steps 1 to 2.
• In step 2, select Application Type – Level in a vessel with stillpipe, Material – Liquid
Low dK, and set the stillpipe diameter as desired.
• The wizard updates the propagation factor according to the pipe diameter, and
enables the CLEF algorithm for low dK liquids (see page 125 for more detail).
Position Detect (2.8.4.2.)
on
• Continue through steps 3 to 5 then click on FINISH AND DOWNLOAD to save settings offline and transfer them to the device.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 43
Changing parameter settings using SIMATIC PDM
Notes:
• For a complete list of parameters, see
Parameter Reference
on page 75.
• Clicking on Cancel during an upload from device to SIMATIC PDM will result in some parameters being updated.
Many parameters are accessed via the 4-level menu in PDM. See
Parameters accessed via pull-down menus
below for the others.
1) Launch SIMATIC PDM, connect to SITRANS LR200, and upload data from the device.
2) Adjust parameter values in the parameter value field then click on Enter. The status fields read Changed.
3) Open the Device menu, click on Download to device, then use File – Save to save settings offline. The status fields are cleared.
value fields
Parameters accessed via pull-down menus
Click on Device or View to open the associated pull-down menus.
pull-down menus
See
Pull-down menus
on page 45 for a table.
Page 44 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Pull-down menus
Device menus page View menus
Communication path
Download to device
Upload to PC/PG
Update Diagnostic Status
Wizard — Quick Start
Echo Profile Utilities 45
Maintenance 50
Wear 52
Select Analog Output 51
Self Test 51
Loop-Test 52
Configuration Flag Reset
Master Reset
52
52
HART Communication 52
Process Variables
Device Status
Toolbar
Status bar
38 Update
page
53
54
Echo Profile Utilities
•
•
•
•
•
Open the menu Device – Echo Profile Utilities and click on the appropriate tab for easy access to:
Echo profile
on page 46
View Saved Echo Profiles
on page 46
TVT Shaper
on page 47
Auto False Echo Suppression
on page 48
Echo Setup
on page 50
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 45
Echo profile
Notes:
• Double click on each axis to see the Xscale and Data Scale values. Right-click or
Left-click on the axis and drag to reposition the scale.
• After saving a profile click on OK, not the x button, to close the Echo Profile Utilities window, otherwise the profile will not be saved.
• In the Echo Profile Utilities window click on the tab Echo Profile.
• Click on the Measure button to update the profile. Select Standard resolution (loads
1 of every 8 points of the profile for a quick view) or Detailed resolution (loads all data points).
• Click on the Save button and in the new window enter a name and click on OK.
• Click on OK to exit.
View Saved Echo Profiles
To view a saved profile, click on the tab View Saved Echo Profiles.
Resolution
Echo Profile Time Based Storage
Echo profile data logging
You can store up to 60 profiles at a selected interval (maximum 60 minutes).
Inside Echo Profile Utilities, in the Echo Profile Time Based Storage window:
• Enter the desired interval between stored profiles.
• Enter the desired number of profiles to be stored (maximum 60).
• Click on Start.A message appears warning of the time delay and warning that all previous saved profiles will be overwritten. Click on OK to proceed. The new profiles will be saved with their date and time.
• Click on the tab View Saved Echo Profiles to view the stored profiles
Page 46 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
TVT Shaper
Note: Double click on each axis to see the Xscale and Data Scale values. Right-click or
Left-click on the axis and drag to reposition the scale.
This feature allows you to manually adjust the TVT to avoid false echoes caused by obstructions. (For an explanation see
Auto False Echo Suppression (2.8.7.1.)
on page 128.)
Open the menu Device – Echo Profile Utilities and click on the tab TVT Shaper
TVT cursor echo profile
• Click on Measure to refresh the echo profile and load the current TVT from the device.
• Change the position of the cursor on the TVT using the Point+ and Point– buttons: raise and lower the TVT using Offset+ and Offset–.
• Alternatively, enter values for Point and Offset directly into the dialog boxes.
• Click on Transfer to Device.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 47
Auto False Echo Suppression
Notes:
• Make sure material level is below all known obstructions at the moment Auto False
Echo Suppression is used to learn the echo profile. We recommend an empty or almost empty vessel.
• Note the distance to material level when the environment is learned, and set Auto
False Echo Suppression Range to a shorter distance to avoid the material echo being screened out.
• Set Auto False Echo Suppression and Auto False Echo Suppression Range during startup, if possible.
• If the vessel contains an agitator it should be running.
• Before adjusting these parameters, rotate the instrument for best signal (lower false-echo amplitude).
If you have a vessel with known obstructions, we recommend using Auto False Echo
Suppression to prevent false echo detection. This feature can also be used if the device displays a false high level, or the reading is fluctuating between the correct level and a false high level.
The device learns the echo profile over the whole measurement range and the TVT is shaped around all echoes present at that moment. (See
Auto False Echo Suppression (2.8.7.1.)
on page 128 for a more detailed explanation.)
The learned TVT will be applied over a specified range. The default TVT is applied over the remainder of the measurement range.
1) Make sure the material level is below all known obstructions.
2) Determine Auto False Echo Suppression Range. Measure the actual distance from the sensor reference point to the material surface using a rope or tape measure.
Subtract 0.5 m (20″) from this distance, and use the resulting value.
Page 48 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
3) Open the menu Device – Echo Profile Utilities and click on the tab Auto False Echo
Suppression.
4) Enter the value for Auto False Echo Suppression Range and select On.
5) Click on Learn. The message appears: ’This will learn a new echo profile. Once done it cannot be undone’. Click on OK.
6) Once Auto TVT is complete click on Transfer to Device. To exit click on OK. Auto TVT is enabled and the learned TVT will be used.
7) To turn Auto False Echo Suppression off or on, reopen the Auto False Echo
Suppression window and click on Off or On.
Before Auto False Echo Suppression
TVT
Hover
Level default TVT false echo material level echo marker
After Auto False Echo Suppression
learned TVT default TVT false echo
Auto False Echo
Suppression Range material level echo marker
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 49
Echo Setup
Provides quick access to echo profile parameters:
Algorithm
Position Detect
Echo Threshold
Damping Filter
CLEF Range
Response Rate
Fill Rate/min.
Empty Rate/min.
Open the menu Device – Echo Profile Utilities and click on Echo Setup.
Maintenance
You can set schedules and reminders for:
• device maintenance based on its projected lifetime
• sensor maintenance based on its projected lifetime
• service
• calibration
To set Device/Sensor Maintenance schedules:
1) Open the menu Device – Maintenance, and click on the Remaining Device/Sensor
Lifetime tab.
Page 50 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
2) Modify desired values, and click on Write.
3) Click on Read, to see the effects of your modification.
4) If desired, set reminders for either or both of Reminder 1 (Required)/Reminder 2
(Demanded).
5) Click on Snooze to add a year to the Total Expected Device Life.
To set Service/Calibration schedules:
1) Open the menu Device – Maintenance, and click on the Service/Calibration
Schedule tab.
2) Modify desired values, and click on Write.
3) Click on Read, to see the effects of your modification.
4) If desired, set reminders for either or both of Reminder 1 (Required)/Reminder 2
(Demanded).
5) Click on Service/Calibration Performed to reset the schedule.
Select Analog Output
Allows you to set the mA Output to report Level, Distance, or Space (see
Current Output
Function (2.6.1.)
on page 81 for an illustration).
If a volume application is selected, mA Output is automatically set to Volume. (See Analog
Output on page 130 for more details.)
1) Open the menu Device – Select Analog Output.
2) The Select Analog Output window displays the current setting: click on OK.
3) Select a different setting and click on OK.
4) The Select Analog Output window displays the new setting: click on OK.
Self Test
Checks memory (RAM and Flash). If there are no errors, returns the message ’Self Test
OK.’ If errors are found, returns the message ’Self Test Fails’.
Open the menu Device – Self Test, select the option Yes and click on OK.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 51
Loop-Test
Note: The simulated AO (Analog Output) value influences output to the control system.
Allows you to input a simulated value (4 mA, 20 mA, or a user-defined value) in order to test the functioning of the mA connections during commissioning or maintenance of the device. (The range is 3.56 mA: see
mA Output Value (2.6.6.)
on page 83).
To simulate a user-defined mA value:
1) Open the menu Device – Loop-Test.
2) Select Other, enter the new value, and click on OK. The message ’Field Device fixed at [new value]’ appears. Click on OK. The Loop-Test window remains open.
3) When you are ready to end simulation, select End and click on OK to return the device to the actual output value.
Configuration Flag Reset
To reset the configuration flag to zero, open the menu Device – Configuration Flag Reset and perform a reset.
Master Reset
Factory Defaults
Use Factory Defaults to reset all user parameters to the default settings, with certain exceptions. The list of exceptions includes, but is not limited to, Tag, Message,
Description, Installation Data, Device Address, Write Protect and PIN to Unlock. Auto
False Echo Suppression Range and the learned TVT also remain unchanged.
1) Open the menu Device – Master Reset and click on OK to perform a reset to Factory
Defaults.
2) After the reset is complete upload parameters to the PC/PG. (If you are performing a reset after replacing the device with a different instrument, do not upload parameters to the PC/PG).
Wear
Reports the number of hours the device has been operating, and the number of times it has been powered up.
Open the menu Device – Wear to view:
• Powered Days
• Power-on Resets
HART Communication
Allows you to set the number of request/response preambles (minimum 5).
Open the menu Device – HART Communication.
Diagnostics
You can monitor level/volume trends, electronics temperature, and device status.
Page 52 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Process Variables
To compare outputs in real time open the menu View – Process Variables and click on
Overview to see reading (level, space, distance, volume); analog output; device status; and current electronics temperature.
To see highest and lowest electronics temperatures, navigate to Level Meter > Maintenance and Diagnostics > Electronics Temperature.
Trend
Open the menu View – Process Variables and click on Trend.
4 trend lines can be monitored:
(distinguished by color in
SIMATIC PDM).
space distance volume level
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 53
Device Status
Open the menu View – Device Status to view Diagnostics, Device Status, Hardware/
Firmware (HW/FW) Status, and Maintenance status.
Update diagnostics
In the Diagnostics window, click on Update diagnostics to update diagnostic information and refresh linked icons.
Update
Open the menu View – Update to refresh the screen.
Page 54 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Security
A password option protects security and communication control parameters from modification by a maintenance user.
When you open a project the User dialog window provides two options: maintenance or specialist. If a password has been set it will not be possible to open the project as a specialist without it. A maintenance user will be able to open the project without a password but will not have access to security and communication control parameters.
1) Open a project, double-click on the device icon, and in the User window select
Specialist.
2) Open the menu Options – Settings and click on the Password tab.
3) Enter a new password and re-enter it in the Confirmation window. Click on OK.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 55
Operating via AMS Device Manager
AMS Device Manager is a software package used to commission and maintain SITRANS
LR200 and other process devices. Please consult the operating instructions or online help for details on using AMS Device Manager. (You can find more information at http://www.emersonprocess.com/AMS/.) Application Guides for setting up Siemens HART devices with AMS Device Manager are available on our website at: www.siemens.com/processautomation.
Functions in AMS Device Manager
Note: While the device is in PROGRAM mode the output remains fixed and does not respond to changes in the device.
AMS Device Manager monitors the process values, alarms and status signals of the device. It allows you to display, compare, adjust, verify, and simulate proces3s device data
Parameters organized into three main function groups allow you to configure and monitor the device:
• Configure/Setup
• Device Diagnostics (read only)
• Process Variables (read only)
See
AMS Menu Structure
on page 69 for a chart
1)
and
Changing parameter settings using AMS Device Manager
on page 61 for more details.
Features of
AMS Device Manager
The graphic interface in SITRANS LR200 makes monitoring and adjustments easy.
Feature page Function
Quick Start 59
Device configuration for simple applications
Echo Profile 65
Echo profile viewing
TVT 64
(Auto False Echo Suppression) – screen out false echoes
Linearization 60
Volume
Process Variables 67
Monitor process variables and level trend
Security 66
Protect security and communication parameters from modification by the maintenance user
1)
The menu structure for AMS Device Manager is almost identical to that for the LCD.
Page 56 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Device Description (DD)
SITRANS LR200 requires the DD for AMS Device Manager version 9.0.
You can locate the DD in Device Catalog, under Sensors/Level/Echo/Siemens Milltronics/
SITRANS LR200. Check the product page of our website at: www.siemens.com/LR200, under
Downloads, to make sure you have the latest version of AMS Device Manager. If you need
to install a new DD see
Configuring a new device
below.
Configuring a new device
1) Check that you have the most recent DD, and if necessary download it from the product page listed above. Save the files to your computer, and extract the zipped file to an easily accessed location.
2) Launch AMS Device Manager– Add Device Type, browse to the unzipped DD file and select it.
Startup
1) Launch AMS Device Manager. (Application Guides for setting up HART devices with
AMS Device Manager can be downloaded from the product page of our website at: www.siemens.com/LR200.)
2) In Device Connection View right-click on the device icon and select Scan Device to upload parameters from the device.
3) Double click the device icon to open the startup screen. The startup screen shows device identification details, and a navigation window on the left-hand side of the screen.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 57
Master Reset
• Navigate to Configure/Setup > Operation
• In the General field click on Master Reset and accept the option Factory Defaults.
Pull-down menu access
Action menu items
A pull-down menu under Actions gives alternative access to several features.
Scan Device
• Open the menu Actions – Scan Device.
• Scan Device uploads parameters from the device (synchronizes parameters).
Device configuration
1) Navigate to Configure/Setup > Operation and click to open the dialog window.
Master
Reset
2) In the General field, click on Master Reset. and perform a reset to Factory Defaults.
3) Open the pull-down menu Actions – Scan Device to synchronize parameters (upload parameters from the device to AMS).
4) Configure the device via the Quick Start wizard.
Page 58 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Quick Start Wizard via AMS Device Manager
Notes:
• The layout of the dialog boxes shown may vary according to the resolution setting for your computer monitor
• At each step, you can accept the default values without modification and click on the next step to proceed.
• After modifying parameters click on Apply inside the Quick Start window to write the new values to the device.
• Click on OK only if you wish to update all parameters to the device and close AMS.
A Wizard provides an easy 5-step Quick Start procedure that configures the device for a simple application.
Quick Start
Step 1 – Identification
1) Navigate to Configure/Setup > Wizard > Quick Start.
2) Click on Step 1.
3) You can accept the default values without modification. (Description, Message, and
Installation Date fields can be left blank.) If desired, make changes then click on
Apply.
Step 2 – Application Type
1) Click on Step 2.
2) Select the application type (Level, Space, Distance, or No Service
1)
(Liquid or Low dielectric liquid).
3) Click on Apply.
) and the material
1)
For details see
Sensor Mode
on page 131.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 59
Step 3 – Vessel Shape
1) Click on Step 3.
2) Select a predefined vessel shape. (To describe a more complex shape see
Linearization below
.)
3) Click on Apply.
Step 4 – Range
1) Click on Step 4.
2) Change units if desired (in meters by default).
3) Set High and Low Calibration points.
4) To convert the reading from level to volume enter a value for Maximum Volume.
5) If a vessel shape with parabolic ends has been selected, set dimensions A and L.
6) Click on Apply.
Step 5 – Summary
Check parameter settings, and click on Cancel to abort, or Apply to transfer values to the device.
Linearization
You can use the linearization feature to define a more complex vessel shape and enter up to
32 level breakpoints where the corresponding volume is known. The values corresponding to
100% and 0% levels must be entered. The breakpoints can be ordered from top to bottom, or
the reverse. (See Linearization on page 41 for an example.)
Using Linearization via the Quick Start wizard
1) Navigate to Configure/Setup > Wizard > Quick Start.
2) In Step 1 – Identification make any desired modifications and click on Apply.
3) In Step 2 – Application Type select a level application and liquid as a material.
4) In Step 3 – Vessel Shape, choose the vessel shape option Linearization Table.
5) In Step 4 – Range Setup enter a value for maximum volume.
Breakpoints maximum volume
Page 60 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
6) Click on the Breakpoints tab and enter values for level and volume for up to 32 breakpoints.
7) Navigate to Configure/Setup > Setup > Linearization and click on Characteristic to preview the characteristic curve of the vessel breakpoints.
In Step 5 – Summary check parameter values. Click on the appropriate step menu to return and revise values, or click on a different menu to exit Quick Start.
Changing parameter settings using AMS Device Manager
Notes:
• For a complete list of parameters, see
Parameter Reference
on page 75.
• For more detailed explanations of the parameters listed below see the pages referenced.
1) Adjust parameter values in the parameter value field in Configure/Setup view, then click on Apply to write the new values to the device. The parameter field will display in yellow until the value has been written to the device.
2) Click on OK only if you wish to update all parameters and exit AMS.
Operation
Navigate to Configure/Setup > Operation and click on Operation to open the dialog window for access to:
General:
• Select Analog Output (see
• Master Reset (see
Select Analog Output
on page 51)
Master Reset
on page 52)
Simulation/Test
• Self Test (see
• Loop Test (see
Self Test
on page 51)
Loop-Test
on page 52)
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 61
Setup
Note: For more detailed explanations of the parameters listed below see the pages referenced.
Sensor
Navigate to Configure/Setup > Setup and click on Sensor for access to:
General [see
Sensor (2.2.)
on page 76]
• Units
• Operating Mode
• Material
• Damping Filter
• Antenna (read only)
Calibration [see
Calibration (2.3.)
on page 77]
• Low Calibration Point
• High Calibration Point
• Sensor Offset
Rate [see
Rate (2.4.)
on page 78]
• Response Rate
• Fill rate/minute
• Empty rate/minute
Fail-safe [see
Fail-safe (2.5.)
on page 80]
• Material level
• Timer
• Level
Page 62 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Analog Output Scaling
Navigate to Configure/Setup > Setup and click on Analog Output Scaling for access to:
Analog Output Scaling [see
Analog Output Scaling (2.6.)
on page 81]
• mA Output Function
• Start of scale
• Full Scale
• Control Range (lower limit)
• Control Range (upper limit)
Signal Processing
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 63
Signal Processing (continued)
General
Navigate to Configure/Setup > Setup > Signal Processing and click on General for access to:
Range [see
Signal Processing (2.8.)
on page 87]
• Near Range
• Far Range
• Propagation Factor
Echo Select [see
Echo select (2.8.4.)
on page 88]
• Algorithm
• Position Detect
• Echo Threshold
• CLEF Range
Sampling [see
Sampling (2.8.5.)
on page 90]
• Echo Lock
• Sampling Up
• Sampling Down
• Echo Lock Window
Signal Quality
• Confidence
• Echo Strength
• Noise Average
• Noise Peak
TVT
Modify the TVT to screen out false echoes [see page 128].
Auto False Echo Suppression (2.8.7.1.)
on
Page 64 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Navigate to Configure/Setup > Setup > Signal Processing and click on TVT. Click on one of the two tabs to access the parameters listed.
TVT Setup [see
Auto False Echo Suppression (2.8.7.1.)
on page 92]
• Auto False Echo Suppression Range
• Auto False Echo Suppression
• Hover Level
• Shaper Mode
TVT Shaper
• Shaper breakpoints 1 to 40. (Turn TVT Setup/Shaper Mode on to activate.)
Manual TVT Curve
Displays the effects of the TVT shaper modifications. Navigate to Configure/Setup > Setup >
Signal Processing and click on Manual TVT Curve.
Echo Profile
• Navigate to Configure/Setup > Setup > Signal Processing and click on Echo
Profile.
• Select Standard operation for faster display.
Local Display
Navigate to Configure/Setup > Setup > Local Display for access to:
• Language
• LCD Fast Mode [see LCD Fast Mode (4.9.) on page 110]
• LCD Contrast [see LCD Contrast (4.10.) on page 110]
Maintenance and Diagnostics
Navigate to Maintenance and Diagnostics for access to:
Remaining Device Lifetime [see
Remaining Device Lifetime (4.2.)
on page 97]
• Lifetime expected
• Remaining Lifetime
• Time in Operation
• Activation of Reminders
• Reminder 1 before Lifetime (Required)
• Reminder 2 before Lifetime (Demanded)
Remaining Sensor Lifetime [see
Remaining Sensor Lifetime (4.3.)
on page
100]
• Lifetime expected
• Remaining Lifetime
• Time in Operation
• Activation of Reminders
• Reminder 1 before Lifetime (Required)
• Reminder 2 before Lifetime (Demanded)
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 65
Service Schedule [see
Service Schedule (4.4.)
on page 103]
• Service Interval
• Time since last Service
• Time until next Service
• Activation of Reminders
• Reminder 1 before Service (Required)
• Reminder 2 before Service (Demanded)
Calibration Schedule [see
Calibration Schedule (4.5.)
on page 106]
• Calibration Interval
• Time since last Calibration
• Total Until Next Calibration
• Activation of Reminders
• Reminder 1 before Calibration (Required)
• Reminder 2 before Calibration (Demanded)
Electronic Temperature
• Electronic Temperature
• Lowest Value
• Highest Value
Wear (see
Wear
on page 52)
• Powered days
• Poweron Resets
Communication
Navigate to Communication to read the following:
Tag; Manufacturer’s ID; Device ID; Product ID; Device Revision; EDD Revision; Universal
Command
Security
Navigate to Configure/Setup > Security to access:
Remote Access [see
Remote Access (6.1.)
on page 111]
Note: If access control is changed to limit remote access, it can only be reset via
the handheld programmer. See Access Control (6.1.1.) on page 111
.
• Write Protect (read only)
• Access Control
Local Access [see
Local Access (6.2.)
on page 112]
• Local Write Protected
• PIN to Unlock
See also
Password Protection
on page 68.
Page 66 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Device Diagnostics
Click on the Device Diagnostics bar at the bottom of the navigation window, for access to:
• Device Status
• Hardware/Firmware Status
Process Variables
To compare outputs in real time click on the Process Variables bar at the bottom of the navigation window for access to:
Process Variable
• Values (level, volume, distance, space)
• Analog output
• Trend View
Echo Profile (also accessible via Signal Processing)
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 67
Password Protection
An AMS Device Manager administrator can configure the user to require a password. The use of passwords is recommended. A password should be assigned to the ’admin’ username immediately after installing AMS Device Manager.
Each user is given an AMS Device Manager username and password and required to enter them when they start AMS Device Manager. Access to functions depends on the level of permissions granted.
Login types
• standard, local, or domain
A standard user can change their password in AMS Device Manager. A Local or Domain
Windows user cannot change their password using AMS Device Manager and must request their network administrator to do so.
User Manager utility
Usernames, passwords, and permissions, are assigned to users by an AMS Device Manager administrator, using the User Manager utility on the Server Plus Station. Only a user with AMS
Device Manager System Administration rights can log in to User Manager.
To configure a new user/edit existing user:
1) From the Windows taskbar select: Start > AMS Device Manager > User Manager.
2) In the User Manager window click on Add User.
The Add User Wizard dialog allows you to:
• select a user type, standard (AMS Device Manager) or Window user.
• enter the username and password, and set permissions
• edit existing users
Page 68 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
AMS Menu Structure
Configure/Setup
Identification
Identification
Tag
Description
Message
Date
Device
Manufacturer
Product Name
Order Number
Final Assembly Number
Hardware Revision
Firmware Revision
Loader Revision
EDD number
Wizard
Quick Start
Step 1 (Identification)
Step 2 (Application Type)
STep 3 (Vessel Shape)
Step 4 (Range)
Step 5 (Summary)
Operation
General
Select Analog Output
Master Reset
Simulation/Test
Self Test
Loop-Test
Setup
Sensor
General
Units
Operating Mode
Material
Damping Filter
Antenna
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 69
Configure/Setup (continued)
Setup/Sensor (continued)
Calibration
Low Calibration Point
High Calibration Point’
Sensor Offset
Rate
Response Rate
Fill rate/minute
Empty rate/minute
Fail-safe
Timer
Material Level
Level
Analog Output Scaling
Analog Output Scaling mA Output Function
Start of Scale
Full Scale
Control Range lower limit
Control Range upper limit
Linearization
Linearization
Vessel Shape
Vessel dimensions
Max. volume
Dimension A
Dimension L
Characteristic
Signal Processing
General
Range
Near Range
Far Range
Propagation Factor
Echo Select
Algorithm
Position Detect
Echo Threshold
CLEF Range
Sampling
Echo Lock
Sampling Up
Sampling Down
Echo Lock Window.
Page 70 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Configure/Setup (continued)
Setup/Signal Processing (continued)
Signal Quality
Confidence
Echo Strength
Noise average
Noise Peak
TVT
TVT Setup
Auto False Echo Suppression Range
Auto False Echo Suppression
Hover Level
Shaper Mode
TVT Shaper
Manual TVT Curve
Echo Profile
Local Display
Maintenance and Diagnostics
Remaining Device Lifetime
Lifetime expected
Remaining Lifetime
Time in Operation
Activation of Reminders
Reminder 1 before Lifetime (Required)
Reminder 2 before Lifetime (Demanded)
Remaining Sensor Lifetime
Lifetime expected
Remaining Lifetime
Time in Operation
Activation of Reminders
Reminder 1 before Lifetime (Required)
Reminder 2 before Lifetime (Demanded)
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 71
Maintenance and Diagnostics (continued)
Service Schedule
Service Interval
Time since last Service
Total Service Interval minus Time Since Last Service
Activation of Reminders
Reminder 1 before Service (Required)
Reminder 2 before Service (Demanded)
Calibration Schedule
Calibration Interval
Time since last Calibration
Total Until Next Calibration
Activation of Reminders
Reminder 1 before Calibration (Required)
Reminder 2 before Calibration (Demanded)
Electronic Temperature
Electronic Temperature
Lowest Value
Highest Value
Wear
Powered days
Poweron Resets
Communication
Security
Remote Access
Write Protect
Access Control
Local Access
Local Write Protected
PIN to Unlock
Page 72 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Operating via FDT (Field Device Tool)
FDT is a standard used in several software packages designed to commission and maintain field devices such as SITRANS LR200. Two commercially available FDTs are PACTware and
Fieldcare.
Functionally FDT is very similar to PDM (see
detail).
Operating via SIMATIC PDM
on page 35 for more
• To configure a field device via FDT you need the DTM (Device Type Manager) for the device.
• To configure a field device via SIMATIC PDM, you need the EDD (Electronic Data
Description) for the device.
Device Type Manager (DTM)
A DTM is a type of software that ’plugs into’ FDT. It contains the same information as an EDD but an EDD is independent of the operating system.
SITRANS DTM
• SITRANS DTM is an EDDL interpreter developed by Siemens to interpret the EDD for that device.
• To use SITRANS DTM to connect to an instrument, you must first install
SITRANS DTM on your system and then install the instrument EDD written for
SITRANS DTM.
• You can download SITRANS DTM from the Siemens service and support website.
Go to http://support.automation.siemens.com, click on Product Support, and drill down to Product Information/Automation Technology/Sensor systems/Process
Instrumentation/Software & Communications.
The instrument EDD
The SITRANS LR200 HART EDD for SITRANS DTM can be downloaded from the product page of our website at www.siemens.com/LR200. Go to Support > Software Downloads.
Configuring a new device via FDT
The full process to configure a field device via FDT is outlined in an application guide which can be downloaded from the product page of our website. Go to: www.siemens.com/LR200 under Support.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 73
Note
Page 74 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Parameter Reference
Notes:
• Parameter names and menu structure are almost identical for SIMATIC PDM and the local user interface (LUI)
1)
.
• Default settings in the parameter tables are indicated with an asterisk (*) unless explicitly stated.
• Mode toggles between PROGRAM and Measurement Modes.
• For Quick Access to parameters via the handheld programmer, press Home , then enter the menu number, for example:
2.2.1.
• In Navigation mode, ARROW keys navigate the menu in the direction of the arrow.
• Press RIGHT arrow to open Edit Mode, or to save a modification.
Parameters are identified by name and organized into function groups. See structure
on page 179 for a chart
1)
.
LCD menu
Parameters accessible via the handheld programmer are preceded by a number.
Parameters not preceded by a number are accessible only via remote operation. For more details see:
•
•
Operating via SIMATIC PDM
on page 35
Operating via AMS Device Manager
on page 56
Quick Start Wizard
The Quick Start wizard provides an easy step-by-step procedure to configure the device for a simple application.
Notes:
• Do not use the Quick Start wizard to modify individual parameters. (Perform customization only after the Quick Start has been completed.)
• For access via remote operation see
37 or
• For detailed instructions see
Quick Start Wizard via SIMATIC PDM
Quick Start Wizard via AMS Device Manager
on page 59 .
on page
Quick Start Wizard via the handheld programmer
on page 31 .
1.1. Language
1.2. Material
1.3. Response Rate
1.4. Units
1)
For AMS Device Manager and DTM Device Manager the structure varies slightly.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 75
1.5. Operating Mode
1.6. Low Calibration Point
1.7. High Calibration Point
1.8. Apply? (Apply changes)
2. Setup
Note: Default settings in the parameter tables are indicated with an asterisk (*) unless explicitly stated.
2.1. Device
2.1.1. Hardware Revision
Corresponds to the electronics hardware of the SITRANS LR200.
2.1.2. Firmware Revision
Corresponds to the firmware that is embedded in the SITRANS LR200.
2.1.3. Loader Revision
Corresponds to the software used to update the SITRANS LR200.
2.1.4. Order Option
Read only. Displays the device type: standard or NAMUR NE 43-compliant.
2.2. Sensor
2.2.1. Units
Sensor measurement units.
Values
m, cm, mm, ft, in
Default: m
2.2.2. Sensor Mode
sensor value
Space
Distance
High
Calibration
Point sensor reference point
(see Dimensions: Uni-
Construction Polypropylene Rod
Antenna on page 12 and
Appendix G: Flange Adapter
Versions on page 152 )
Level
Low
Calibration
Point
Far Range
Mode
NO
SERVICE
Description
Measurement and associated loop current are not updated, and the device defaults to Fail-safe mode a)
.
LEVEL
*
SPACE
Distance to material surface a)
DISTANCE
See Material Level (2.5.1.) for more detail.
Reference point
n/a
Low Calibration Point
(process empty level)
High Calibration Point
(process full level)
Sensor Reference Point
Page 76 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
2.2.3. Material
Automatically configures the device to operate in the chosen application type,
by changing one or more of the following parameters: Propagation Factor
(2.8.3.), Position Detect (2.8.4.2.), and/or CLEF Range (2.8.4.4.).
Options
Related parameters
*
LIQUID
LIQUID LOW DK a)
(low dielectric liquid – CLEF algorithm enabled)
Propagation Factor (2.8.3.)
Position Detect (2.8.4.2.)
CLEF Range (2.8.4.4.)
a) dK < 3.0
You can configure each of the related parameters, to suit your particular application.
2.2.4. Damping Filter
The time constant for the damping filter. The damping filter smooths out the response to a sudden change in level. This is an exponential filter and the engi-
neering unit is always in seconds (see Damping on page 130 for more detail).
Values
Range: 0 to 100.000 s
Default: 10.000 s
2.2.5. Antenna
Read only. Identifies antenna configuration (Near Range [blanking] distance is automatically adjusted to suit).
2.3. Calibration
Note: We recommend using the Quick Start wizard to configure the device.
2.3.1. Low Calibration Pt.
Distance from sensor reference point
1)
defined in Units (2.2.1.).
to Low Calibration Point.
Units are
Values
Range: 0 to 20 m. Default 20.00 m
Related parameters
Units (2.2.1.)
Far Range (2.8.2.)
1)
The point from which level measurement is referenced (see Dimensions: Uni-Construction Polypropylene Rod Antenna on page 12 and
Appendix G: Flange Adapter
Versions on page 152 ).
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 77
2.3.2. High Calibration Pt.
Distance from sensor reference point
defined in Units (2.2.1.).
1)
to High Calibration Point. Units are
Values
Related parameters
Range: 0 to 20 m. Default 0.00 m
Units (2.2.1.)
Near Range (2.8.1.)
When setting the High Calibration Point value, note that echoes are ignored
within Near Range (see
Near Range (2.8.1.)
on page 129 for details).
2.3.3. Sensor Offset
A constant offset that can be added to or subtracted from sensor value
1)
to compensate if the sensor reference point has shifted. (For example, this could result from adding a thicker gasket or reducing the standoff/nozzle height).
Values
Related parameters
Range: -99.999 to +99.999. Default: 0.00
Units (2.2.1.)
2.4. Rate
Note: Default settings in the parameter tables are indicated with an asterisk (*) unless explicitly stated.
2.4.1. Response Rate
Note: Changing Response Rate resets Fill Rate (2.4.2.), Empty rate (2.4.3.), and
Damping Filter (2.2.4.).
Sets the reaction speed of the device to measurement changes.
Response Rate
(2.4.1.)
* slow medium fast
Fill Rate
(2.4.2.)
Empty rate
(2.4.3.)
0.1 m/min (0.32 ft/min)
1.0 m/min (3.28 ft/min)
10.0 m/min (32.8 ft/min)
Damping Filter
(2.2.4.)
10 s
10 s
0 s
Use a setting just faster than the maximum filling or emptying rate (whichever is faster).
1)
The value produced by the echo processing which represents the distance from sen-
sor reference point to the target. (see Sensor Mode (2.2.2.) on page 76 for an illustra-
tion).
Page 78 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
2.4.2. Fill Rate
Defines the maximum rate at which the reported sensor value
1)
is allowed to increase. Allows you to adjust the SITRANS LR200 response to increases in the actual material level. Fill Rate is automatically updated whenever Response
Rate is altered.
Options
Range: 0 to 99999 m / min.
Response Rate (2.4.1.)
* Slow
Medium
Fast
Response Rate (2.4.1.)
Fill Rate
0.1 m/min (0.32 ft/min)
1.0 m/min (3.28 ft/min)
10.0 m/min (32.8 ft/min)
Altered by:
Related parameters
Units (2.2.1.)
Enter a value slightly greater than the maximum vessel-filling rate, in units per minute.
2.4.3. Empty rate
Defines the maximum rate at which the reported sensor value
2)
is allowed to decrease. Adjusts the SITRANS LR200 response to decreases in the actual material level. Empty Rate is automatically updated whenever Response Rate is altered.
Options
Range: 0 to 99999 m / min.
Response Rate (2.4.1.)
* Slow
Medium
Fast
Response Rate (2.4.1.)
Empty Rate
0.1 m/min (0.32 ft/min)
1.0 m/min (3.28 ft/min)
10.0 m/min (32.8 ft/min)
Altered by:
Related parameters
Units (2.2.1.)
Enter a value slightly greater than the vessel’s maximum emptying rate, in units per minute.
1)
2)
The value produced by the echo processing which represents the distance from sen-
sor reference point to the target (see Sensor Mode (2.2.2.) on page 76 for an illustra-
tion).
The value produced by the echo processing which represents the distance from sen-
sor reference point to the target (see Sensor Mode (2.2.2.) on page 76 for an illustra-
tion).
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 79
2.5. Fail-safe
Note: Default settings in the parameter tables are indicated with an asterisk (*) unless explicitly stated.
2.5.1. Material Level
Note: The default setting depends whether your device is a standard or
NAMUR NE 43-compliant device.
Defines the mA output to use when the Fail-safe Timer expires.
Options
HI
LO
STANDARD DEVICE
20.5 mA (max. mA Limit)
3.8 mA (min. mA Limit)
* HOLD Last valid reading (default 22.6 mA)
VALUE User-selected value [defined in Level (2.5.3.)]
Options
HI
LO
NAMUR NE 43-COMPLIANT DEVICE
20.5 mA (max. mA Limit)
3.8 mA (min. mA Limit)
HOLD Last valid reading
* VALUE
User-selected value [defined in Level (2.5.3.): default
3.58 mA]
2.5.2. Timer
Note: When a Loss of Echo occurs Material Level (2.5.1.) determines the
material level to be reported when the Fail-safe timer expires. See
Loss of
Echo (LOE)
on page 132 for more detail.
Sets the time to elapse since the last valid reading, before the Fail-safe Level is
reported.
Values
Range: 0.00 to 7200 seconds
Default: 100 s
2.5.3. Level
Notes:
• The default setting depends whether your device is a standard or NAMUR
NE 43-compliant device.
• Material Level (2.5.1.) must be set to VALUE to enable the Level value to be
reported.
Allows the user to define the mA value to be reported when the Fail-safe timer expires.
Device Type
STANDARD
NAMUR NE43-
COMPLIANT
Values
Range
Default
3.56 mA to 22.6 mA
22.60 mA 3.58 mA
Page 80 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
2.6. Analog Output Scaling
2.6.1. Current Output Function
Notes:
• Level, space, and distance, have different reference points.
• Sensor Mode resets Current Output Function to the same setting.To select
a different option, do so after Sensor Mode has been set.
• Use caution when changing Current Output Function while the device is connected to a HART network. Current Output Function controls the pri-
mary value and the loop current for the device.
• Current Output Function also affects the secondary, tertiary and quater-
nary variables in a HART network.
Sensor ref. pt.
High
Cal.
Pt.
Allows
Current Output Function (2.6.1.)
to be set independently from Sensor
Mode. For example, Sensor Mode may be set to Level and
Current Output
Function (2.6.1.)
set to Distance.
Level Space Distance
20 mA
100%
Space
4 mA
0%
4 mA
0%
Distance
Low
Cal.
Pt.
Level
4 mA
0%
20 mA
100%
20 mA
100% a)
Options Reference point Description
* Level
Space
Low Calibration Point
High Calibration Point measured as a percentage of the difference between High Calibration Point and Low Calibration Point
Distance sensor reference point measured as a percentage of Low
Calibration Point converts a level measurement to a volume output Volume
Manual a)
(LUI only)
allows mA Output Value (2.6.6.) to be set to a user-defined value
Current Output Function must be set to Manual before modifying mA Output Value
(2.6.6.). Remember to restore the previous Current Output Function setting after
modifying mA Output Value.
To modify Current Output Function via SIMATIC PDM:
the
on page 51 for more detail.)
Select Analog Output
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 81
2.6.2. Start of Scale (4 mA Setpoint)
Sets the process level corresponding to the 4 mA value. 4 mA always defaults
to 0, and Current Output Function (2.6.1.) determines whether this is a Level,
Space, Distance, or Volume measurement. (See Current Output Function (2.6.1.)
for an illustration.)
Values
Related
Parameters
Range:
–999999 to +999999
Default: 0.00 m (set to value corresponding to 0% as defined by
Current Output Function)
Units (2.2.1.)
Current Output Function (2.6.1.)
• Enter the reading that is to correspond to a 4 mA output.
• Units are defined in Units (2.2.1.) for Level, Space, or Distance. Units are
unspecified for Volume.
2.6.3. Full Scale (20 mA Setpoint)
Sets the process level corresponding to the 20 mA value. 20 mA always defaults
to 100%, and Current Output Function (2.6.1.) determines whether this is a Level,
Space, or Distance measurement. (See Current Output Function (2.6.1.) for an
illustration.
)
Values
Related
Parameters
Range:
–999999 to +999999
Default: 20.00 m (set to value corresponding to 100% as defined by
Current Output Function)
Units (2.2.1.)
Current Output Function (2.6.1.)
• Enter the reading that is to correspond to a 20 mA output.
• Units are defined in Units (2.2.1.) for Level, Space, or Distance. Units are
unspecified for Volume
.
2.6.4. Control Range; lower limit (Min. mA limit)
Prevents the mA output from dropping below this minimum level for a measurement value. This does not restrict the Fail-safe or Manual settings.
Values
Range:
3.8 to 20.5 (mA)
Default: 3.80 (mA)
2.6.5. Control Range; upper limit (Max. mA limit)
Prevents the mA output from rising above this maximum level for a measurement value. This does not restrict the Fail-safe or Manual settings.
Values
Range:
3.8 to 20.5 (mA)
Default: 20.50 (mA)
Page 82 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
2.6.6. mA Output Value
Allows you to use a simulated value to test the functioning of the loop.
You can enter 4 mA, 20 mA, or any other user-defined value within the range.
Values
Range: 3.56 mA to 22.6 mA
Read Only unless Current Output Function (2.6.1.) is set to Manual.
Related parameter
Current Output Function (2.6.1.) a) First set Current Output Function (2.6.1.) to Manual.
b) Enter the desired mA value in mA Output Value.
c) After completing the test, remember to reset Current Output Function
(2.6.1.) to the previous setting.
Via SIMATIC PDM:
Open the menu Device – Loop Test. (For more detail, see
Loop-Test
on page 52
.)
2.7. Linearization
2.7.1. Volume
Carries out a volume conversion from a level value.
Defines the vessel shape and allows the LR200 to calculate volume instead of level. If None is selected, no volume conversion is performed. Select the vessel shape matching the monitored vessel or reservoir.
*
Vessel Shape
None
LCD DISPLAY/
Description
NONE/
No volume calculation required
N/A
Also required
CYLINDER/
Flat end horizontal cylinder maximum volume
SPHERE/
Sphere maximum volume
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 83
Vessel Shape
(cont’d)
LCD DISPLAY/
Description
Also required
LINEAR/
Upright, linear (flat bottom) maximum volume
A
CONICAL BOT/
Conical or pyramidal bottom maximum volume, dimension A
A
PARABOLIC BOT/Parabolic bottom maximum volume, dimension A
HALF SPHERE BOT/
Half-sphere bottom maximum volume, dimension A
A
A
FLAT SLOPED BOT/
Flat sloped bottom maximum volume, dimension A
A
L
PARABOLIC ENDS/
Parabolic end horizontal cylinder maximum volume, dimension A, dimension L
LINEAR TABLE a)
/
Linearization table
(level/volume breakpoints) maximum volume, tables
1-32 level and volume breakpoints a)
Linearization Table must be selected in order for level/volume values [see
Table 1-8 (2.7.2.)] to be transferred.
Page 84 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
The maximum volume of the vessel. Enter the vessel volume corresponding to High Calibration Point. For example, if your maximum vessel volume is
8000 L, enter a value of 8000. Volume units are defined by the user but are not explicitly stated in the SITRANS LR200
Values
Related Parameters
Range: 0.0000 to 99999
Default: 100.0
Low Calibration Pt. (2.3.1.)
High Calibration Pt. (2.3.2.)
Vessel Shape (2.7.1.1.)
The height of the vessel bottom when the bottom is conical, pyramidal, parabolic, spherical, or flat -sloped. If the vessel is horizontal with parabolic
ends, the depth of the end. See Vessel Shape (2.7.1.1.) for an illustration.
Values
Related Parameters
Range: 0.0000 to 99999 mm
Default: 0.0
Units (1.4.)
Vessel Shape (2.7.1.1.)
Length of the cylindrical section of a horizontal parabolic end vessel. See
Vessel Shape (2.7.1.1.) for an illustration.
Values
Related Parameters
Range: 0.0000 to 99999 mm
Default: 0.0
Units (1.4.)
Vessel Shape (2.7.1.1.)
2.7.2. Table 1-8
Note: Linearization Table must be selected in Vessel Shape (2.7.1.1.) in order
for level/volume values to be transferred.
If your vessel shape is more complex than any of the preconfigured shapes, you can define the shape as a series of segments. A value is assigned to each level breakpoint and a corresponding value is assigned to each volume breakpoint.
Level values are defined in Units (2.2.1.). Volume units are defined by the user
but are not explicitly stated in the SITRANS LR200.
Level Values
Volume Values
Range: 0.0000 to 99999 mm
Default: 0.0
Range: 0.0000 to 99999
Default: 0.0
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 85
Enter up to 32 level breakpoints, where the corresponding volume is known.
The values corresponding to 100% and 0% levels must be entered. The breakpoints can be ordered from top to bottom, or the reverse.
Breakpoints are grouped into four tables: Table 1-8, Table 9-16, Table 17-24, and
Table 25-32.
Entering breakpoints via SIMATIC PDM:
Using Linearization via the Quick Start wizard
on page 41 .
Entering breakpoints via the handheld programmer:
a) The default unit for level values is m: to change it navigate to Setup (2.) >
Sensor (2.2.) > Units (2.2.1.), and select the desired unit.
b) Navigate to Setup (2.) > Linearization (2.7.) > Maximum Volume (2.7.1.2.),
and enter the value.
c) Go to the appropriate table for the particular breakpoint you wish to adjust: for example, go to Table 1-8 for breakpoint 1.
d) Under Table 1-8, go to Level 1 (2.7.2.1.) to enter the level value for the
breakpoint 1.
e) Under Table 1-8, go to Volume 1 (2.7.2.2.) to enter the volume value for the
breakpoint 1 f) Repeat steps c) to e), till values have been entered for all required breakpoints.
1 a) Press RIGHT arrow to open Edit mode.
b) Enter level value and press RIGHT arrow to accept it.
c) Press Down ARROW to move to corresponding volume breakpoint.
1 a) Press RIGHT arrow to open Edit mode.
b) Enter volume value and press RIGHT arrow to accept it.
c) Press Down ARROW to move to next level breakpoint.
Example (values are for example purposes only)
Breakpoint number
Level value
Breakpoint Level value
Number (m)
4 19.5
1 0
2 5
3
2
1
9
5
0
3
4
9
19.5
Volume value (l)
0
500
3000
8000
2.7.3. Table 9-16
2.7.4. Table 17-24
2.7.5. Table 25-32
Page 86 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
2.8. Signal Processing
Note: Default settings in the parameter tables are indicated with an asterisk (*) unless explicitly stated.
2.8.1. Near Range
The range in front of the device (measured from the sensor reference point) within which any echoes will be ignored. This is sometimes referred to as blanking or a dead zone. The factory set range is dependent on the antenna type.
Values
Range: 0 to 20 m (0 to 65.6 ft).
Default: Depends on the antenna. 0.3 m (1 ft), plus any shield length, from the sensor reference point a)
100 mm shield version default is 0.42 m (0.3 m plus 0.12 m from device reference to the end of the shield).
See also
Min. detectable distance1)
on page 6 .
a)
For the reference point for each configuration, see
Dimensions: Uni-Construction
Polypropylene Rod Antenna
on page 12 for the standard version, or
Appendix G:
Flange Adapter Versions
, page 152 onwards.
2.8.2. Far Range
Note: Far Range can extend beyond the bottom of the vessel.
Allows the material level to drop below Low Calibration Point without
generating a Loss of Echo (LOE) state. See Sensor Mode (2.2.2.) on page 76 for
an illustration.
Values
Range: 0 to 23 m (0 to 75.4 ft). Min. value depends on the setting for Low
Calibration Pt. (2.3.1.).
Default: Low Calibration Point setting + 1 m (3.2 ft)
Use this feature if the measured surface can drop below the Low Cal. Point in normal operation.
2.8.3. Propagation Factor
Notes:
• When operating with a waveguide antenna or stillpipe, values for CLEF
Range (2.8.4.4.) on page 89, and for the propagation factor, should be set
according to the antenna frequency and the antenna/pipe size. See the tables below.
• For reliable results the horn size must be close to the pipe size.
Compensates for the change in microwave velocity due to propagation within a metal stillpipe instead of in free space.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 87
5.8 GHz Model
Values
Antenna/Pipe Size
(I.D.) a)
Range: 0.3 to 1.5 depending on pipe size.
Default: 1.000
50 mm (2”)
Propagation Factor
0.7953
80 mm
(3”)
0.9254
100 mm
(4”)
0.9530
150 mm (6”)
0.9794
a)
Since pipe dimensions may vary slightly, the propagation factor may also vary.
200 mm
(8”)
0.9884
6.3 GHz Model
Values
Range: 0.3 to 1.5 depending on pipe size.
Default: 1.000
Antenna/Pipe Size
(I.D.) a)
50 mm (2”)
Propagation Factor
0.8298
80 mm
(3”)
0.9372
100 mm
(4”)
0.9603
150 mm (6”)
0.9825
a)
Since pipe dimensions may vary slightly, the propagation factor may also vary.
200 mm
(8”)
0.9902
2.8.4. Echo select
2.8.4.1. Algorithm
Selects the algorithm to be applied to the echo profile to extract the true echo.
Options
* tF true First echo
L Largest echo
BLF Best of First or Largest echo
Defines where on the echo the distance measurement is determined.
See
Position Detect (2.8.4.2.)
on page 125 for more detail.
Options
Center
* Hybrid (Center and CLEF)
CLEF (Constrained Leading Edge Fit)
Related parameters
CLEF Range (2.8.4.4.)
If the vessel bottom is being reported as the level instead of the actual material level (at low level conditions), or if the dielectric constant of the
liquid to be monitored is less than 3, we recommend setting Position
Detect (2.8.4.2.) to Hybrid and CLEF Range (2.8.4.4.) to 0.5 m (1.64 ft).
Page 88 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Sets the minimum echo confidence that the echo must meet in order to prevent a Loss of Echo condition and the expiration of the Fail-safe (LOE)
timer. When Confidence (2.8.6.1.) exceeds Echo Threshold (2.8.4.3.), the
echo is accepted as a valid echo and is evaluated.
Values
Range: 0 to 99
Default: 5
Related
Parameters
Timer (2.5.2.)
Use this feature when an incorrect material level is reported.
Note: CLEF Range is referenced from Low Calibration Point (process empty level).
The CLEF algorithm is used mainly to allow correct level reporting for low dK materials which may otherwise cause an incorrect reading in an empty or almost empty vessel.
It is used from Low Calibration Point (process empty level) up to the level defined by CLEF range (see illustration below). Above that point the Center
algorithm is used. For more detail see CLEF Range (2.8.4.4.) on page 127 .
Values
Related parameters
Range: 0 to 20 m (0 to 65.6 ft)
Default: 0.00 m
Position Detect (2.8.4.2.)
sensor reference point
CLEF Range
Low Calibration Point
(process empty level)
In applications with low dK materials we recommend setting CLEF Range
to 0.5 m (1.64 ft) and Position Detect (2.8.4.2.) to Hybrid.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 89
2.8.5. Sampling
Provides a method of checking the reliability of a new echo before accepting it as the valid reading, based on numbers of samples above or below the currently selected echo.
Note: Ensure the agitator is always running while SITRANS LR200 is monitoring the vessel, to avoid stationary blade detection.
Selects the measurement verification process.
Options
Related parameters
Lock Off
Maximum Verification (not recommended for radar)
*
Material Agitator
Total Lock (not recommended for radar)
Fill Rate (2.4.2.)
Empty rate (2.4.3.)
Sampling Up (2.8.5.2.)
Sampling Down (2.8.5.3.)
For radar applications, Material Agitator is the most often-used setting, to avoid agitator blade detection.
Specifies the number of consecutive echoes that must appear above the echo currently selected, before the measurement is accepted as valid.
Values
Range: 1 to 50
Default: 5
Specifies the number of consecutive echoes that must appear below the echo currently selected, before the measurement is accepted as valid.
Values
Range: 1 to 50
Default: 2
Page 90 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
2.8.6. Echo Quality
2.8.6.1. Confidence
Indicates echo reliability: higher values represent better echo quality. The
display shows the echo confidence of the last measurement. Echo
Threshold (2.8.4.3.) defines the minimum criterion for echo confidence.
Values (view only)
0 to 99
—-
Related Parameters
Echo Threshold (2.8.4.3.)
Shot not used
Open the menu View – Echo Profile.
2.8.6.2. Echo Strength
Displays the absolute strength (in dB above 1 μV rms) of the echo selected as the measurement echo.
Values (view only)
–20 to 99
Open the menu View – Echo Profile.
Displays the average ambient noise (in dB above 1 μV rms) of a noise profile. Noise level is a combination of transient noise and receiving circuitry. After a measurement, the values from the previous noise shot will be displayed.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 91
2.8.7. TVT setup
Note: Default settings in the parameter tables are indicated with an asterisk
(*) unless explicitly stated.
Used together with Auto False Echo Suppression Range (2.8.7.2.) to screen
out false echoes in a vessel with known obstructions.
A ’learned TVT’ (time varying threshold) replaces the default TVT over a specified range. See
Auto False Echo Suppression (2.8.7.1.) on page 128 for a more detailed
explanation.
Notes:
• Make sure material level is below all known obstructions when Auto
False Echo Suppression is used to learn the echo profile. (An empty or almost empty vessel is recommended.)
• Note the distance to material level when Auto False Echo learns the environment. Set Auto False Echo Suppression Range to a shorter distance to avoid the material echo being screened out.
• Set Auto False Echo Suppression and Auto False Echo Suppression
Range during startup, if possible.
• If the vessel contains an agitator it should be running.
• Before adjusting these parameters, rotate the instrument for best signal (lower false-echo amplitude).
Before Auto False Echo Suppression
TVT
Hover
Level default TVT false echo material level echo marker a) Determine Auto False Echo Suppression Range. Measure the actual distance from the sensor reference point to the material surface using a rope or tape measure.
b) Subtract 0.5 m (20″) from this distance, and use the resulting value.
Page 92 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
After Auto False Echo Suppression
learned TVT default TVT false echo
Auto False Echo
Suppression Range material level echo marker
To set Auto False Echo Suppression via SIMATIC PDM:
Open the menu Device – Echo Profile Utilities and click on the tab Auto
False Echo Suppression.
(For more detailed instructions see
.)
Auto False Echo Suppression
on page 48
To set Auto False Echo Suppression via the handheld programmer:
Options
OFF
* ON
Default TVT will be used.
’Learned’ TVT will be used.
LEARN ’Learn’ the TVT.
c)
Go to Auto False Echo Suppression Range (2.8.7.2.) and enter the
value calculated in step b).
d)
Go to Auto False Echo Suppression (2.8.7.1.) and press RIGHT arrow
to open Edit Mode e) Select Learn. The device will automatically revert to On (Use
Learned TVT) after a few seconds.
Specifies the range within which Learned TVT is used (see Auto False Echo
Suppression (2.8.7.1.) on page 128 for more detail).
Values
Related parameters
Range: 0.00 to 20.00 m
Default: 1.00 m
Units (1.4.)
a)
Calculate range according to Auto False Echo Suppression (2.8.7.1.)
steps a) and b).
b) Press RIGHT arrow to open Edit mode.
c) Enter the new value and press RIGHT arrow to accept it.
d)
Set Auto False Echo Suppression (2.8.7.1.).
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 93
Defines how high the TVT (Time Varying Threshold) is placed above the noise floor of the echo profile, as a percentage of the difference between
the peak of the largest echo in the profile and the noise floor. See Before
Auto False Echo Suppression on page 92 for an illustration.
Values
Range: 0 to 100%
Default: 40%
When the device is located in the center of the vessel, the TVT hover level may be lowered to increase the confidence level of the largest echo.
2.8.7.4. Shaper Mode
Enables/disables the TVT shaper.
Options
ON
* OFF
2.8.8. TVT shaper
Notes:
• The range is –100 to 100 bits. With 2 bits per dB this gives a range of –50 to
50 dB.
• Shaper Mode (2.8.7.4.) must be turned ON in order for TVT shaper points to
be transferred
Adjusts the TVT (Time Varying Threshold) at a specified range (breakpoint on the TVT). This allows you to reshape the TVT to avoid unwanted echoes. There are 40 breakpoints arranged in 5 groups. (We recommend using SIMATIC PDM to access this feature.)
To use TVT shaper via SIMATIC PDM:
• Open the menu Device – Echo Profile Utilities and click on TVT Shaper. For more detail see
TVT Shaper
on page 47 .
To use TVT shaper via LUI (local user interface):
a) Go to Breakpoint 1-9 (2.8.8.1.).
b) Open Shaper 1 and enter the TVT Offset value (between –50 and 50).
c) Go to the next Shaper point and repeat steps c) and d) till all desired breakpoint values have been entered.
2.8.8.1. Breakpoint 1-9
Values
Range: –50 to 50 dB
Default: 0 dB
Page 94 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
2.8.8.2. Breakpoint 10-18
Values
Range: –50 to 50 dB
Default: 0 dB
2.8.8.3. Breakpoint 19-27
Values
Range: –50 to 50 dB
Default: 0 dB
2.8.8.4. Breakpoint 28-36
Values
Range: –50 to 50 dB
Default: 0 dB
2.8.8.5. Breakpoint 37-40
Values
Range: –50 to 50 dB
Default: 0 dB
2.8.9. Measured Values
Read only. Allows you to view Measured Values for diagnostic purposes.
To access Measured Values via SIMATIC PDM:
Open the menu View – Process Variables.
The value for level.
The value for space.
The value for distance.
2.8.9.4. Volume Measurement
The value for volume.
3. Diagnostics
3.1. Echo Profile
•
•
Allows you to request the current echo profile either locally via the handheld programmer, or remotely. Remote options are:
SIMATIC PDM (see
Echo profile
on page 46 )
AMS Device Manager (see
Echo Profile
on page 65 )
To request a profile via SIMATIC PDM open the menu Device – Echo Profile Utilities.
(For more detail see
Echo Profile Utilities
on page 45 .)
To request a profile via the handheld programmer: a) In PROGRAM mode, navigate to LEVEL METER > DIAGNOSTICS (3) > ECHO
PROFILE (3.1) b) Press RIGHT arrow to request a profile.
For more detail see
Requesting an Echo Profile
on page 33 .
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 95
3.2. Electronics Temperature
3.2.1. Current Internal Temperature
Read only. Displays (in degrees C) the current temperature on the circuit board recorded by the internal electronics.
For access via SIMATIC PDM open the menu View – Process Variables and check the field Electronics Temperature.
3.2.2. Highest value
Read only. Displays (in degrees C) the maximum temperature recorded by the internal electronics. The high and low values are maintained over a power cycle.
Via SIMATIC PDM navigate to Maintenance and Diagnostics > Electronics
Temperature.
3.2.3. Lowest value
Read only. Displays (in degrees C) the minimum temperature recorded by the internal electronics. The high and low values are maintained over a power cycle.
Via SIMATIC PDM navigate to Maintenance and Diagnostics > Electronics
Temperature.
4. Service
Note: Default settings in the parameter tables are indicated with an asterisk (*) unless explicitly stated.
4.1. Master Reset
Note:
Following a reset to Factory Defaults, complete reprogramming is required.
Resets user parameters to factory defaults, with certain exceptions. The list of exceptions includes, but is not limited to, Tag, Message, Description, Installation
Data, Device Address, Write Protect and PIN to Unlock. Auto False Echo Suppression
Range and the learned TVT also remain unchanged.
*
Options
Idle or Done (Return to previous menu)
Factory Defaults
To perform a reset to factory defaults via SIMATIC PDM, open the menu Device –
Master Reset and click on Factory Defaults.
Page 96 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
4.2. Remaining Device Lifetime
Notes:
• Default settings in the parameter tables are indicated with an asterisk (*) unless explicitly stated.
• Four sets of parameters allow you to monitor the Device/Sensor Lifetimes and set up Maintenance/Service schedules, based on operating hours instead of a
calendar-based schedule. See also Remaining Sensor Lifetime (4.3.), Service
Schedule (4.4.), and Calibration Schedule (4.5.).
• Performing a reset to Factory Defaults will reset all the Maintenance Schedule parameters to their factory defaults.
• The device operates in years. To view Remaining Device Lifetime parameters in
hours or days (via SIMATIC PDM only) see Lifetime Expected (4.2.1.).
The device tracks itself based on operating hours and monitors its predicted lifetime.
You can modify the expected device lifetime, set up schedules for maintenance reminders, and acknowledge them.
The maintenance warnings and reminders are available through HART communications. This information can be integrated into an Asset Management system. For optimal use, we recommend that you use SIMATIC PCS7 Asset
Management Software in conjunction with SIMATIC PDM.
•
•
•
To access these parameters via SIMATIC PDM:
Open the menu Device – Maintenance and select the Remaining Device Lifetime tab.
After modifying values/units as required, click on Write to accept the change, and Read to view the effect of the change.
Click on Snooze to add a year to the Total Expected Device Life.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 97
a)
Options a)
Hours; days; years
Default: years
Selectable only via SIMATIC PDM.
4.2.1. Lifetime Expected
Note: The device always operates in years. Changing the units affects only the parameter view of the Remaining Device Lifetime parameters in
SIMATIC PDM.
Allows you to override the factory default.
Values
Units a)
: hours, days, years
Range: 0 to 20 years
Default: 10.00 years a)
Units are selectable only via SIMATIC PDM.
4.2.2. Time in Operation
Read only. The amount of time the device has been operating.
4.2.3. Remaining Lifetime
Read only. Lifetime Expected (4.2.1.) less Time in Operation (4.2.2.).
Page 98 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
4.2.4. Reminder Activation
Note: To modify this parameter via SIMATIC PDM it must be accessed via the pull-down menu Device – Maintenance.
Allows you to enable a maintenance reminder
Options
Reminder 1 (Maintenance Required)
Reminder 2 (Maintenance Demanded)
Reminders 1 and 2(Required and Demanded)
* OFF
a) First set the values in Reminder 1 (Required) (4.2.5.)/Reminder 2
(Demanded) (4.2.6.).
b) Select the desired Reminder Activation option.
4.2.5. Reminder 1 (Required)
If Remaining Lifetime (4.2.3.) is equal to or less than this value, the device
generates a Maintenance Required reminder.
Values
Range: 0 to 20 years
Default: 0.16 years a) Modify values as required.
b) Set Reminder Activation (4.2.4.) to the desired option.
4.2.6. Reminder 2 (Demanded)
If Remaining Lifetime (4.2.3.) is equal to or less than this value, the device
generates a Maintenance Demanded reminder.
Values
Range: 0 to 20 years
Default: 0.02 years a) Modify values as required.
b) Set Reminder Activation (4.2.4.) to the desired option.
4.2.7. Maintenance Status
Indicates which level of maintenance reminder is active.
In SIMATIC PDM, open the menu View – Device Status, click on the
Maintenance tab, and check the Device Lifetime Status window.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 99
4.2.8. Acknowledge Status
Indicates which level of maintenance reminder has been acknowledged.
In SIMATIC PDM, open the menu View – Device Status, click on the
Maintenance tab, and check the Device Lifetime Status window.
4.2.9. Acknowledge
Acknowledges the current maintenance reminder.
To acknowledge a reminder via SIMATIC PDM: a) Open the menu View – Device Status and click on the tab Maintenance.
b) In the Device Lifetime section, click on Acknowledge Warnings.
To acknowledge a reminder via the handheld programmer:
a) Press RIGHT arrow twice to open parameter view and activate Edit
Mode.
b) Press RIGHT arrow to acknowledge the reminder.
4.3. Remaining Sensor Lifetime
Notes:
• Default settings in the parameter tables are indicated with an asterisk (*) unless explicitly stated.
• Four sets of parameters allow you to monitor the Device/Sensor Lifetimes and set up Maintenance/Service schedules, based on operating hours instead of a
calendar-based schedule. See also Remaining Device Lifetime (4.2.), Service
Schedule (4.4.), and Calibration Schedule (4.5.).
• Performing a reset to Factory Defaults will reset all the Maintenance Schedule parameters to their factory defaults.
• The device operates in years. To view Remaining Sensor Lifetime parameters in
hours or days (via SIMATIC PDM only) see Lifetime Expected (4.3.1.).
The device monitors the predicted lifetime of the sensor (the components exposed to the vessel environment). You can modify the expected sensor lifetime, set up schedules for maintenance reminders, and acknowledge them.
•
•
•
•
To access these parameters via SIMATIC PDM:
Open the menu Device – Maintenance and select the Remaining Sensor
Lifetime tab.
After modifying values/units as required, click on Write to accept the change, and Read to view the effect of the change.
Click on Snooze to add a year to the Total Expected Sensor Life.
Click on Sensor Replaced to restart the timer and clear any fault messages.
Page 100 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Options a)
Hours; days; years
Default: years a)
Selectable only via SIMATIC PDM.
4.3.1. Lifetime Expected
Note: The device always operates in years. Changing the units affects only the parameter view of Remaining Sensor Life parameters in SIMATIC PDM.
Allows you to override the factory default.
Values
Units a)
: hours, days, years
Range: 0 to 20 years
Default: 10.00 years a)
Units are selectable only via SIMATIC PDM.
4.3.2. Time in Operation
The amount of time the sensor has been operating. Can be reset to zero after performing a service or replacing the sensor.
To reset to zero:
• In SIMATIC PDM, open the menu Device – Maintenance, click on the
Remaining Sensor Lifetime tab, and click on Sensor Replaced to restart the timer and clear any fault messages.
• Via the handheld programmer, manually reset Time in Operation (4.3.2.) to
zero.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 101
4.3.3. Remaining Lifetime
Read only. Lifetime Expected (4.3.1.) less Time in Operation (4.3.2.).
4.3.4. Reminder Activation
Note: To modify this parameter via SIMATIC PDM it must be accessed via the pull-down menu Device – Maintenance.
Allows you to enable a maintenance reminder.
Options
Reminder 1 (Maintenance Required)
Reminder 2 (Maintenance Demanded)
Reminders 1 and 2
* OFF
a) First set the values in Reminder 1 (Required) (4.3.5.)/Reminder 2
(Demanded) (4.3.6.).
b) Select the desired Reminder Activation option.
4.3.5. Reminder 1 (Required)
If Remaining Lifetime (4.3.3.) is equal to or less than this value, the device
generates a Maintenance Required reminder.
Values
Range: 0 to 20 years
Default: 0.164 years a) Modify values as required.
b) Set Reminder Activation (4.3.4.) to the desired option.
4.3.6. Reminder 2 (Demanded)
If Remaining Lifetime (4.3.3.) is equal to or less than this value, the device
generates a Maintenance Demanded reminder.
Values
Range: 0 to 20 years
Default: 0.019 years a) Modify values as required.
b) Set Reminder Activation (4.3.4.) to the desired option.
4.3.7. Maintenance Status
Indicates which level of maintenance reminder is active.
In SIMATIC PDM, open the menu View – Device Status, click on the
Maintenance tab, and check the Sensor Lifetime Status window.
Page 102 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
4.3.8. Acknowledge Status
Indicates which level of maintenance reminder has been acknowledged.
In SIMATIC PDM, open the menu View – Device Status, click on the
Maintenance tab and check the Sensor Lifetime Status window.
4.3.9. Acknowledge
Acknowledges the current maintenance reminder.
To acknowledge a reminder via SIMATIC PDM: a) Open the menu View – Device Status and click on the tab Maintenance.
b) In the Device Lifetime section, click on Acknowledge Warnings.
To acknowledge a reminder via the handheld programmer:
a) Press RIGHT arrow twice to open parameter view and activate Edit
Mode.
b) Press RIGHT arrow to acknowledge the reminder.
4.4. Service Schedule
Notes:
• Four sets of parameters allow you to monitor the Device/Sensor Lifetimes and set up Maintenance/Service schedules, based on operating hours instead of a
calendar-based schedule. See also Remaining Device Lifetime (4.2.), Remaining
Sensor Lifetime (4.3.), and Calibration Schedule (4.5.).
• Performing a reset to Factory Defaults will reset all the Maintenance Schedule parameters to their factory defaults.
• The device operates in years. To view Service Interval parameters in hours or
days (via SIMATIC PDM only) see Service Interval (4.4.1.).
The device tracks service intervals based on operating hours and monitors the predicted lifetime to the next service. You can modify the Total Service Interval, set schedules for maintenance reminders, and acknowledge them.
The maintenance warnings and reminders are communicated to the end user through status information. This information can be integrated into any Asset
Management system. For optimal use, we recommend that you use SIMATIC PCS7
Asset Management Software in conjunction with SIMATIC PDM.
•
•
•
To access these parameters via SIMATIC PDM:
Open the menu Device – Maintenance and select the Service Schedule tab.
After modifying values/units as required, click on Write to accept the change, and Read to view the effect of the change.
Click on Service Performed to restart the timer and clear any fault messages.
(see illustration on next page)
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 103
Options a)
Hours; days; years
Default: years a)
Selectable only via SIMATIC PDM.
4.4.1. Service Interval
Note: The device always operates in years. Changing the units affects only the parameter view of the Service Interval parameters in SIMATIC PDM.
User-configurable recommended time between product inspections
.
Units a)
: hours, days, years
Values
Range: 0 to 20 years
Default: 1.0 year a)
Units are selectable only via SIMATIC PDM.
4.4.2. Time since Last Service
Time elapsed since last service. Can be reset to zero after performing a service.
To reset to zero:
• In SIMATIC PDM, open the menu Device – Maintenance, click on the
Service Schedule tab, and click on Service Performed to restart the timer and clear any fault messages.
• Via the handheld programmer, manually reset Time since Last Service
(4.4.2.) to zero.
Page 104 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
4.4.3. Time until Next Service
Read only. Time Units () less Time since Last Service (4.4.2.).
4.4.4. Reminder Activation
Note: To modify this parameter via SIMATIC PDM it must be accessed via the pull-down menu Device – Maintenance.
Allows you to enable a maintenance reminder.
Values
* Timer OFF
ON — no reminders checked
ON — Reminder 1 (Maintenance Required) checked
ON — Reminders 1and 2 checked
ON -Reminder 2 (Maintenance Demanded) checked
a) First set the values in Reminder 1 (Required) (4.4.5.)/Reminder 2
(Demanded) (4.4.6.).
b) Select the desired Reminder Activation option.
4.4.5. Reminder 1 (Required)
If Time until Next Service (4.4.3.) is equal to or less than this value, the device
generates a Maintenance Required reminder.
Values
Range:
0 to 20 years
Default: 0.164 years a) Modify values as required.
b) Set Reminder Activation (4.4.4.) to the desired option.
4.4.6. Reminder 2 (Demanded)
If Time until Next Service (4.4.3.) is equal to or less than this value, the device
generates a Maintenance Demanded reminder.
Values
Range: 0 to 20 years
Default: 0.019 years a) Modify values as required.
b) Set Reminder Activation (4.4.4.) to the desired option.
4.4.7. Maintenance Status
Indicates which level of maintenance reminder is active.
Open the menu View – Device Status, click on the Maintenance tab and check the Service Schedule Status window.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 105
4.4.8. Acknowledge Status
Indicates which level of maintenance reminder has been acknowledged.
Open the menu View – Device Status, click on the Maintenance tab and check the Service Schedule Status window.
4.4.9. Acknowledge
Acknowledges the current maintenance reminder.
To acknowledge a reminder via SIMATIC PDM: a) Open the menu View – Device Status and click on the tab Maintenance.
b) In the Device Lifetime section, click on Acknowledge Warnings.
To acknowledge a reminder via the handheld programmer:
a) Press RIGHT arrow twice to open parameter view and activate Edit
Mode.
b) Press RIGHT arrow to acknowledge the reminder.
4.5. Calibration Schedule
Notes:
• Default settings in the parameter tables are indicated with an asterisk (*) unless explicitly stated.
• Four sets of parameters allow you to monitor the Device/Sensor Lifetimes and set up Maintenance/Service schedules, based on operating hours instead of a
calendar-based schedule. See also Remaining Device Lifetime (4.2.), Remaining
Sensor Lifetime (4.3.), and Service Schedule (4.4.).
• Performing a reset to Factory Defaults will reset all the Maintenance Schedule parameters to their factory defaults.
• The device operates in years. To view Calibration Interval parameters in hours or
days (via SIMATIC PDM only) see Calibration Interval (4.5.1.).
The device tracks calibration intervals based on operating hours and monitors the predicted lifetime to the next calibration. You can modify the Total Calibration Interval, set schedules for maintenance reminders, and acknowledge them.
•
•
•
To access these parameters via SIMATIC PDM:
Open the menu Device – Maintenance and select the Calibration Schedule tab.
After modifying values/units as required, click on Write to accept the change, and Read to view the effect of the change.
Click on Calibration Performed to restart the timer and clear any fault messages.
Page 106 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
a)
Options a)
Hours; days; years
Default: years
Selectable only via SIMATIC PDM.
4.5.1. Calibration Interval
Note: The device always operates in years. Changing the units affects only the parameter view of the Calibration Interval parameters in SIMATIC PDM.
User-configurable recommended time between product calibrations.
Units a)
: hours, days, years
Values
Range: 0 to 20 years
Default: 1.0 year a)
Units are selectable only via SIMATIC PDM.
4.5.2. Time since Last Calibration
Time elapsed since last calibration. Can be reset to zero after performing a calibration.
To reset to zero:
• In SIMATIC PDM, open the menu Device – Maintenance, click on the
Calibration Schedule tab, and click on Calibration Performed to restart the timer and clear any fault messages.
• Via the handheld programmer, manually reset Time since Last Calibration
(4.5.2.) to zero.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 107
4.5.3. Time until Next Calibration
Read only. Calibration Interval (4.5.1.) less Time since Last Calibration (4.5.2.).
4.5.4. Reminder Activation
Note: To modify this parameter via SIMATIC PDM it must be accessed via the pull-down menu Device – Maintenance.
Allows you to enable a maintenance reminder.
Values
* Timer OFF
ON — no reminders checked
ON — Reminder 1 (Maintenance Required) checked
ON — Reminders 1 and 2 checked
ON — Reminder 2 (Maintenance Demanded) checked
a) First set the values in Reminder 1 (Required) (4.3.5.)/Reminder 2
(Demanded) (4.5.6.).
b) Select the desired Reminder Activation option.
4.5.5. Reminder 1 (Required)
If Time until Next Calibration (4.5.3.) is equal to or less than this value, the device
generates a Maintenance Required reminder.
Values
Range: 0 to 20 years
Default: 0.164 years a) Modify values as required.
b) Set Reminder Activation (4.5.4.) to the desired option.
4.5.6. Reminder 2 (Demanded)
If Time until Next Calibration (4.5.3.) is equal to or less than this value, the device
generates a Maintenance Demanded reminder.
Values
Range:
0 to 20 years
Default: 0.019 years a) Modify values as required.
b) Set Reminder Activation (4.5.4.) to the desired option.
Page 108 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
4.5.7. Maintenance Status
Indicates which level of maintenance reminder is active.
In SIMATIC PDM, open the menu View – Device Status, click on the
Maintenance tab and check the Calibration Schedule Status window.
4.5.8. Acknowledge Status
Indicates which level of maintenance reminder has been acknowledged.
In SIMATIC PDM, open the menu View – Device Status, click on the
Maintenance tab and check the Calibration Schedule Status window.
4.5.9. Acknowledge
Acknowledges the current maintenance reminder.
To acknowledge a reminder via SIMATIC PDM: a) Open the menu View – Device Status and click on the tab Maintenance.
b) In the Device Lifetime section, click on Acknowledge Warnings.
To acknowledge a reminder via the handheld programmer:
a) Press RIGHT arrow twice to open parameter view and activate Edit
Mode.
b) Press RIGHT arrow to acknowledge the reminder.
4.6. Manufacture Date
The date of manufacture of the SITRANS LR200 (yy mm dd).
4.7. Powered Hours
Displays the number of hours the unit has been powered up since manufacture.
In SIMATIC PDM, open the menu View – Wear.
4.8. Power-on Resets
The number of power cycles that have occurred since manufacture.
In SIMATIC PDM, open the menu View – Wear.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 109
4.9. LCD Fast Mode
Notes:
• LCD Fast Mode takes effect only after 30 minutes of inactivity. (Each time the device is powered up, a further 30 minutes of inactivity is required.)
• LCD Fast Mode affects Measurement mode only; it has no effect on Navigation mode.
Enables a faster rate of measurement from the device by disabling most of the display area. Only the bar graph will be refreshed when LCD Fast Mode is set to ON.
Values
ON or OFF
4.10. LCD Contrast
The factory setting is for optimum visibility at room temperature and in average light conditions. Extremes of temperature will lessen the contrast.
Values
Range: 0 (High contrast) to 20 (Low contrast). Default: 10
Adjust the value to improve visibility in different temperatures and light conditions.
Change the value in small steps to ensure you can continue to read the display.
4.11. Memory Test
Allows verification of the RAM, EEPROM, and Flash memory of the SITRANS LR200.
LCD Display
IDLE
BUSY
PASS
FAIL
Err1
P Oxcafe
F Oxcafe
No test in progress.
Test in progress.
Memory test successful.
Test failed.
Test returned unexpected results.
Test passed with result data.
Test failed with result data.
Handheld programmer entry
to
Any numeric key from 1 to 9 activates test.
• Press RIGHT arrow to edit then press any numeric key from 1 to 9 to activate the test.
• The reading will display BUS and then the test result text.
Page 110 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
5. Communication
Note: Default settings in the parameter tables are indicated with an asterisk (*) unless explicitly stated.
5.1. Device Address
Sets the device address or poll ID on a HART network. Any address other than 0 will cause the output current to be a fixed value, and the current will not indicate the reading.
Values
Range:
0 to 15
Default: 0
•
•
To reset Device Address via SIMATIC PDM:
Open the project in Process Device Network View then right-click on the device.
Go to Object Properties > Connection to access the field Short Address.
6. Security
Note: Default settings in the parameter tables are indicated with an asterisk (*) unless explicitly stated.
6.1. Remote Access
6.1.1. Access Control
Note: If access control is changed to limit remote access, it can only be reset via the handheld programmer.
Enables /disables the read/write access to parameters via remote communications.
Options
Read only
No changes are permitted via remote communications.
*
Read Write Changes are permitted.
Restricted
Sets the status to Read only, with the potential for another HART device to change this parameter only, via remote communications.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 111
6.2. Local Access
6.2.1. Write Protect
Note: This lock affects only the handheld programmer. A remote master can
change configuration if Access Control (6.1.1.) is set to allow this.
Prevents any changes to parameters via the handheld programmer.
Options
*
Range: 0 to 99999
Unlock value (
stored in PIN to Unlock
(6.2.2.)
Any other value
Lock Off
Lock On
• To turn Lock On, key in any value other than the Unlock Value stored in PIN to Unlock (6.2.2.).
• To turn Lock Off, key in the Unlock Value stored in PIN to Unlock (6.2.2.).
6.2.2. PIN to Unlock
Notes:
• Do not lose your Unlock Value: it cannot be displayed once Write Protect
(6.2.1.) has been set to a different value.
• Valid only for operation via the handheld programmer.
• A reset to Factory Defaults will not restore the unlock value at time of shipping.
Stores the value to be entered in Write Protect (6.2.1.) to unlock programming.
If Write Protect (6.2.1.) is set to a different value PIN to Unlock (6.2.2.) does not
display the Unlock value
Handheld
Programmer
Values
Range: 0 to 99999
Value when shipped: 1954. Not restored by a reset to Factory
Defaults.
– – – – Display when Lock is on
7. Language
Selects the language to be used on the LCD.
Options
*
English
Deutsch
Français
Español
Page 112 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Appendix A: Alphabetical Parameter
List
Note:
Maintenance Parameters are not listed below. See
Remaining Device
Lifetime
on page 97,
Remaining Sensor Lifetime
on page 100,
Service
Schedule
on page 103, and
Calibration Schedule
on page 106 for those
parameters.
Parameter Name (Parameter Number)
Full Scale (20 mA Setpoint) (2.6.3.)
Start of Scale (4 mA Setpoint) (2.6.2.)
Access Control (6.1.1.)
Algorithm (2.8.4.1.)
Auto False Echo Suppression (2.8.7.1.)
Auto False Echo Suppression Range (2.8.7.2.)
CLEF Range (2.8.4.4.)
Confidence (2.8.6.1.)
Current Internal Temperature (3.2.1.)
Current Output Function (2.6.1.)
Damping Filter (2.2.4.)
Device Address (5.1.)
Dimension A (2.7.1.3.)
Dimension L (2.7.1.4.)
Distance Measurement (2.8.9.3.)
Echo Lock (2.8.5.1.)
Echo Profile (3.1.)
Echo Quality (2.8.6.)
Echo Strength (2.8.6.2.)
Echo Threshold (2.8.4.3.)
Empty rate (2.4.3.)
Far Range (2.8.2.)
Level (2.5.3.)
Fill Rate (2.4.2.)
Firmware Revision (2.1.2.)
Hardware Revision (2.1.1.)
High Calibration Pt. (2.3.2.)
Highest value (3.2.2.)
Hover Level (2.8.7.3.)
Language (7.)
LCD Contrast (4.10.)
LCD Fast Mode (4.9.)
Page Number
96
94
112
110
110
79
76
76
78
89
79
87
80
90
95
91
91
111
85
85
95
91
96
81
77
88
92
93
89
82
82
111
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 113
Parameter Name (Parameter Number)
Level Measurement (2.8.9.1.)
Loader Revision (2.1.3.)
Low Calibration Pt. (2.3.1.)
Lowest value (3.2.3.)
mA Output Value (2.6.6.)
Manufacture Date (4.6.)
Master Reset (4.1.)
Material (2.2.3.)
Material Level (2.5.1.)
Control Range; upper limit (Max. mA limit) (2.6.5.)
Maximum Volume (2.7.1.2.)
Memory Test (4.11.)
Control Range; lower limit (Min. mA limit) (2.6.4.)
Near Range (2.8.1.)
Sensor Mode (2.2.2.)
PIN to Unlock (6.2.2.)
Position Detect (2.8.4.2.)
Powered Hours (4.7.)
Power-on Resets (4.8.)
Propagation Factor (2.8.3.)
Response Rate (2.4.1.)
Sensor Offset (2.3.3.)
Space Measurement (2.8.9.2.)
Timer (2.5.2.)
Measured Values (2.8.9.)
Units (2.2.1.)
Vessel Shape (2.7.1.1.)
Volume 1 (2.7.2.2.)
Volume Measurement (2.8.9.4.)
Write Protect (6.2.1.)
Page Number
86
95
112
80
95
76
83
87
78
78
95
112
88
109
109
110
82
87
76
77
80
82
85
96
83
109
96
95
76
77
Page 114 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Appendix B: Troubleshooting
Communication Troubleshooting
1) Check the following:
• There is power at the instrument.
• The LCD shows the relevant data.
• The device can be programmed using the handheld programmer.
• If any fault codes are being displayed see
General Fault Codes
on page 117 for a
detailed list.
2) Verify that the wiring connections are correct.
3) See the table below for specific symptoms.
Symptom
The device cannot be programmed via the handheld programmer.
Corrective action
• Ensure Write Protect (6.2.1.) on page 112 is set to the unlock
value.
You try to set a SITRANS LR200 parameter via remote communications but the parameter remains unchanged.
• Ensure Write Protect (6.2.1.) on page 112 is set to the unlock
value, then try setting the parameter via the handheld programmer.
• Ensure Access Control (6.1.1.) on page 111 is set to Read/
Write.
• Some parameters can be changed only when the device is not scanning. Try pressing Mode to put the device into
PROGRAM mode.
If you continue to experience problems, go to our website at: www.siemens.com/LR200, and check the FAQs for SITRANS LR200, or contact your
Siemens Milltronics representative.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 115
Device Status Icons
Icon
Priority
Level
Meaning
1
2
3
• Maintenance alarm
• Measurement values are not valid
• Maintenance warning: maintenance demanded immediately
• Measured signal still valid
• Maintenance required
• Measured signal still valid
1
• Process value has reached an alarm limit
2
3
• Process value has reached a warning limit
1
2
3
1
2
3
• Process value has reached a tolerance limit
• Configuration error
• Device will not work because one or more parameters/components is incorrectly configured
• Configuration warning
• Device can work but one or more parameters/components is incorrectly configured
• Configuration changed
• Device parameterization not consistent with parameterization in project.
Look for info text.
• Manual operation (local override)
• Communication is good; device is in manual mode.
• Simulation or substitute value
• Communication is good; device is in simulation mode or works with substitute values.
• Out of operation
• Communication is good; device is out of action.
Page 116 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Icon
Priority
Level
Meaning (cont’d)
• Data exchanged
• No data exchange
• Write access enabled
• Write access disabled
General Fault Codes
Notes:
• If more than one fault is present, the device status indicator and text for each fault alternate at 2 second intervals.
• Some faults cause the device to go to Fail-safe mode (Fault 52). These are indicated with an asterisk (*).
General Fault Codes
Code /
Icon
Meaning
S: 0
S: 2
S: 3
*
*
Corrective Action
The device was unable to get a measurement within the Fail-safe LOE
Timer period. Possible causes: faulty installation, antenna material buildup, foaming/other adverse process conditions, invalid configuration range.
• Ensure installation details are correct.
• Ensure no antenna material buildup.
Clean if necessary.
• Adjust process conditions to minimize foam or other adverse conditions.
• Correct configuration range.
• If fault persists, contact your local Siemens representative.
Unable to collect profile because of a power condition that is outside the operating range of the device.
Repair required: contact your local Siemens representative.
Device is nearing its lifetime limit according to the value set in Maintenance Required
Limit.
Replacement is recommended.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 117
General Fault Codes (cont’d)
Code /
Icon
S: 4
Meaning
S: 6
S: 7
Corrective Action
Device is nearing its lifetime limit according to the value set in Maintenance Demanded
Limit.
Replacement is recommended.
Sensor is nearing its lifetime limit according to the value set in Maintenance Required
Limit.
Replacement is recommended.
Sensor is nearing its lifetime limit according to the value set in Maintenance Demanded
Limit.
Replacement is recommended.
S: 8
Service interval as defined in Maintenance
Required Limit has expired.
Perform service.
S: 9
Service interval as defined in Maintenance
Demanded Limit has expired.
Perform service.
S: 11
S: 12
S: 17
Internal temperature sensor failure.
Calibration interval as defined in Maintenance Required Limit has expired.
Repair required: contact your local Siemens representative.
Internal temperature of device has exceeded specifications: it is operating outside its temperature range.
• Relocate device and/or lower process temperature enough to cool device.
• Inspect for heat-related damage and contact your local Siemens representative if repair is required.
• Fault code will persist until a manual reset is performed using SIMATIC PEM or the LCD interface.
Perform calibration.
S: 18
Calibration interval as defined in Maintenance Demanded Limit has expired.
Perform calibration.
S: 28
*
Internal device failure caused by a RAM memory error.
Repair required: contact your local Siemens representative.
Page 118 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
General Fault Codes (cont’d)
Code /
Icon
S: 29
*
Meaning
EEPROM damaged.
S: 31
* Flash error.
Corrective Action
Repair required: contact your local Siemens representative.
Repair required: contact your local Siemens representative.
S: 33
*
Factory calibration for the internal temperature sensor has been lost.
Repair required: contact your local Siemens representative.
S: 34
*
Factory calibration for the device has been lost.
Repair required: contact your local Siemens representative.
S: 35
*
Factory calibration for the device has been lost.
Repair required: contact your local Siemens representative.
S: 36
* Unable to start microwave module.
Cycle power. If fault persists, contact your local Siemens representative.
S: 37
S: 38
S: 43
*
*
*
Measurement hardware problem.
Failure in the device electronics.
Factory calibration for the radar receiver has been lost.
Cycle power. If fault persists, contact your local Siemens representative.
Cycle power. If fault persists, contact your local Siemens representative: repair required.
Repair required: contact your local Siemens representative.
S: 45
S: 48
*
*
No valid boot program detected: firmware corrupt.
Repair required: contact your local Siemens representative.
User configuration is invalid. One or more of parameters: Low Calibration Point, High
Calibration Point, Volume breakpoints, and/ or Auto False-Echo Suppression, are set to invalid values.
• Reconfigure the unit.
• Ensure the difference between High Calibration Point and Low Calibration Point is not less than or equal to zero; do a Master Reset.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 119
General Fault Codes (cont’d)
Code /
Icon
S: 49
*
Meaning
EEPROM corrupt.
S: 50
* EEPROM corrupt.
Corrective Action
Repair required: contact your local Siemens representative.
S: 51
S: 52
S: 53
Repair required: contact your local Siemens representative.
*
*
EEPROM corrupt.
Repair required: contact your local Siemens representative.
Fail-safe is activated. Possible causes:
1) hardware failure
2) memory failure
3) Fail-safe LOE timer expired– possible causes: faulty installation, antenna material buildup, foaming/other adverse process conditions, invalid calibration range.
For 3):
• Correct configuration; ensure installation is correct;
• no antenna buildup;
• adjust process conditions to minimize foaming/other adverse conditions;
• correct calibration range.
If fault persists, or for 1) and 2), contact your local Siemens representative.
Configuration lost: one or more parameter settings have been lost. This may occur after a firmware upgrade causes user parameters to be reset.
Restore user parameters using SIMATIC
PDM.
Page 120 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Operation Troubleshooting
Operating symptoms, probable causes, and resolutions.
Symptom
Display shows
S: 0 LOE
Operation Troubleshooting
Cause Action
level or target is out of range
• check specifications
• check Low Calibration Pt. (2.3.1.)
• increase Confidence (2.8.6.1.)
Display shows
S: 0 LOE material build-up on antenna
• clean the antenna
• re-locate SITRANS LR200
Display shows
S: 0 LOE
Display shows
S: 0 LOE
Reading does not change, but the level does
Measurement is consistently off by a constant amount
Screen blank location or aiming:
• poor installation
• flange not level
• Auto False Echo Suppression may be incorrectly applied antenna malfunction:
• temperature too high
• physical damage
• excessive foam
• multiple echoes
SITRANS LR200 processing wrong echo, for example, vessel wall, or structural member
• setting for Low Calibration
Pt. (2.3.1.) not correct
• setting for Sensor Offset
(2.3.3.) not correct
• check to ensure nozzle is vertical
• ensure end of antenna protrudes from end of nozzle
• review
Auto False Echo Suppression
(2.8.7.1.)
on page 128
• ensure Auto False Echo Suppression
Range is set correctly
• check Current Internal Temperature (3.2.1.)
• use foam deflector or stillpipe
• relocate
• use a defoamer
• set Algorithm (2.8.4.1.) to F (First echo)
• re-locate SITRANS LR200
• check nozzle for internal burrs or welds
• rotate instrument 90°
• use Auto False Echo Suppression (2.8.7.1.)
if necessary: see
Auto False Echo Suppression (2.8.7.1.)
on page 128
• check distance from sensor reference
point to Low Calibration Pt. (2.3.1.)
• check Sensor Offset (2.3.3.)
power error too much load resistance
• check nameplate rating against voltage supply
• check power wiring or source
• change barrier type, or
• remove something from the loop, or
• increase supply voltage
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 121
Symptom
Reading erratic
Operation Troubleshooting (cont’d)
Cause
echo confidence weak liquid surface vortexed
Reading response slow
Reads correctly but occasionally reads high when vessel is not full material filling
Fill Rate (2.4.2.) setting incor-
rect
• detecting close range echo
• build up near top of vessel or nozzle
• nozzle problem
Action
• refer to Confidence (2.8.6.1.)
• use Auto False Echo Suppression (2.8.7.1.)
and Auto False Echo Suppression Range
(2.8.7.2.)
• use foam deflector or stillpipe
• decrease Fill Rate (2.4.2.)
• relocate instrument to side pipe
• increase confidence threshold in Echo
Threshold (2.8.4.3.)
• re-locate SITRANS LR200
• increase measurement response if possible
• clean the antenna
• use Auto False Echo Suppression (2.8.7.1.)
and Auto False Echo Suppression Range
(2.8.7.2.)
Level reading lower than actual material level
• material is within Near
Range zone
• multiple echoes processed
• vessel near empty and low dK material
• decrease Near Range (2.8.1.) (minimum
value depends on antenna type)
• raise SITRANS LR200
• ensure Algorithm (2.8.4.1.) is set to F (First
echo)
• ensure Material (2.2.3.) selection is LIQ-
UID LOW DK
• set Position Detect (2.8.4.2.) to Hybrid
• set CLEF Range (2.8.4.4.) to 0.5 m
Page 122 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Appendix C: Maintenance
SITRANS LR200 requires no maintenance or cleaning under normal operating conditions.
Under severe operating conditions, the horn antenna may require periodic cleaning. If cleaning becomes necessary:
• Note the antenna material and the process medium, and select a cleaning solution that will not react adversely with either.
• Remove the instrument from service and wipe the antenna clean using a cloth and suitable cleaning solution.
Unit Repair and Excluded Liability
All changes and repairs must be done by qualified personnel, and applicable safety regulations must be followed. Please note the following:
• The user is responsible for all changes and repairs made to the device.
• All new components must be provided by Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments
Inc.
• Restrict repair to faulty components only.
• Do not re-use faulty components.
Replacing the antenna
• When a new antenna is installed the propagation factor will not change.
• After replacing the antenna check the material level reported by the device against
the actual material level, and if necessary use Sensor Offset (2.3.3.) on page 78 to
compensate.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 123
Appendix D: Technical Reference
Note: Where a number follows the parameter name (for example, Algorithm (2.8.4.1.)
this is the parameter access number via the handheld programmer. See Parameter
Reference on page 75 for a complete list of parameters.
Principles of Operation
SITRANS LR200 is a 2-wire 6 GHz pulse radar level transmitter for continuous monitoring of liquids and slurries
1)
. Radar level measurement uses the time of flight principle to determine distance to a material surface. The device transmits a signal and waits for the return echo. The transit time is directly proportional to the distance from the material.
Pulse radar uses polarized electromagnetic waves. Microwave pulses are emitted from the antenna at a fixed repetition rate, and reflect off the interface between two materials with different dielectric constants (the atmosphere and the material being monitored).
Electromagnetic wave propagation is virtually unaffected by temperature or pressure changes, or by changes in the vapor levels inside a vessel. Electromagnetic waves are not attenuated by dust.
SITRANS LR200 consists of an enclosed electronic circuit coupled to an antenna and process connection. The electronic circuit generates a radar signal (6.3 GHz in North
America, 5.8 GHz elsewhere) that is directed to the antenna.
The signal is emitted from the antenna, and the reflected echoes are digitally converted to an echo profile. The profile is analyzed to determine the distance from the material surface to the sensor reference point
2)
. This distance is used as a basis for the display of material level and mA output.
Echo Processing
Process Intelligence
The signal processing technology embedded in Siemens radar level devices is known as
Process Intelligence.
Process intelligence provides high measurement reliability regardless of the dynamically changing conditions within the vessel being monitored. The embedded Process
Intelligence dynamically adjusts to the constantly changing material surfaces within these vessels.
1)
2)
The microwave output level is significantly less than that emitted from cellular phones.
See Dimensions: Uni-Construction Polypropylene Rod Antenna on page 12 or Appendix G: Flange Adapter Versions on page 152.
Page 124 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Process Intelligence is able to differentiate between the true microwave reflections from the surface of the material and unwanted reflections being returned from obstructions such as seam welds or supports within a vessel. The result is repeatable, fast and reliable measurement. This technology was developed as result of field data gained over some twenty years from more than 1,000,000 installations in many industries around the world.
Higher order mathematical techniques and algorithms are used to provide intelligent processing of microwave reflection profiles. This “knowledge based” technique produces superior performance and reliability.
Echo Selection
Time Varying Threshold (TVT)
A Time Varying Threshold (TVT) hovers above the echo profile to screen out unwanted reflections (false echoes).
In most cases the material echo is the only one which rises above the default
TVT.
In a vessel with obstructions, a false
echo may occur. See Auto False Echo
Suppression (2.8.7.1.) on page 128 for
more details.
default TVT echo profile material level echo marker
The device characterizes all echoes that rise above the TVT as potential good echoes.
Each peak is assigned a rating based on its strength, area, height above the TVT, and reliability, amongst other characteristics.
Algorithm (2.8.4.1.)
The true echo is selected based on the setting for the Echo selection algorithm. Options are true First Echo, Largest Echo, or best of First and Largest.
Position Detect (2.8.4.2.)
The echo position detection algorithm determines which point on the echo will be used to calculate the precise time of flight, and calculates the range using the calibrated
propagation velocity (see Propagation Factor (2.8.3.) for values). There are three options:
• Center
• Hybrid
• CLEF (Constrained Leading Edge Fit)
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 125
Center
Uses center of the echo.
Hybrid
Uses the Center algorithm for the top part of the vessel, and the CLEF algorithm for the part nearest the vessel bottom, according to the setting for CLEF range.
CLEF (Constrained Leading Edge Fit)
• Uses the leading edge of the echo.
• Is used mainly to process the echo from materials with a low dK value.
In an almost empty flat-bottomed vessel, a low dK material may reflect an echo weaker than the echo from the vessel bottom. The echo profile shows these echoes merging. The device may then report a material level equal to or lower than empty
The CLEF algorithm enables the device to report the level correctly.
Example: CLEF off: Position set to Hybrid
Vessel height: 1.5 m; CLEF range set to 0 (Center algorithm gives the same result.) default TVT material echo vessel bottom echo selected echo marker
Example: CLEF enabled
Vessel height: 1.5 m; CLEF range set to 0.5 m default TVT material echo selected vessel bottom echo echo marker
Page 126 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
CLEF Range (2.8.4.4.)
CLEF Range is referenced from Low Calibration Point (process empty level). When the
Hybrid algorithm is selected in Position Detect (2.8.4.2.), the CLEF algorithm will be
applied up to the limit of CLEF Range. Above this limit the Center algorithm will be applied.
sensor reference point
(Center algorithm applied)
CLEF Range
High
Calibration
Point
(process full level)
Low Calibration
Point
(process empty level)
Echo Threshold (2.8.4.3.)
Confidence (2.8.6.1.) describes the quality of an echo. Higher values represent higher
quality. Echo Threshold defines the minimum confidence value required for an echo to be accepted as valid and evaluated.
Echo Lock (2.8.5.1.)
If the echo selected by Algorithm is within the Echo Lock window, the window is centered about the echo, which is used to derive the measurement. In radar applications, two measurement verification options are used:
Lock Off
SITRANS LR200 responds immediately to a new selected echo (within the restrictions set by the Maximum Fill / Empty Rate), but measurement reliability is affected.
Material Agitator
A new measurement outside the Echo Lock Window must meet the sampling criteria before the window will move to include it.
The other available options, Maximum Verification and Total Lock are not recommended for radar.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 127
Auto False Echo Suppression (2.8.7.1.)
Notes:
• For detailed instructions on using this feature via PDM see Auto False Echo
Suppression on page 48.
• For detailed instructions on using this feature via the handheld programmer see
Auto False Echo Suppression (2.8.7.1.) on page 92.
Auto False Echo Suppression is designed to learn a specific environment (for example, a particular vessel with known obstructions), and in conjunction with Auto False Echo
Suppression Range to remove false echoes appearing in front of the material echo.
The material level should be below all known obstructions at the moment when Auto
False Echo Suppression learns the echo profile. Ideally the vessel should be empty or almost empty, and if an agitator is present, it should be running.
The device learns the echo profile over the whole measurement range and the TVT is shaped around all echoes present at that moment.
Auto False Echo Suppression Range (2.8.7.2.)
Auto False Echo Suppression Range specifies the range within which the learned TVT is applied. Default TVT is applied over the remainder of the range.
The learned TVT screens out the false echoes caused by obstructions. The default TVT allows the material echo to rise above it.
Auto False Echo Suppression Range must be set to a distance shorter than the distance to the material level when the environment was learned, to avoid the material echo being screened out.
Example before Auto False Echo Suppression
sensor reference point default
TVT
High Cal. Pt.
= 0 obstruction at 1.2 m false echo echo marker material level material level at
2.9 m
Page 128 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Example after Auto False Echo Suppression
learned TVT
Auto False Echo
Suppression
Range default
TVT material level
Auto False Echo
Suppression
Range set to 2 m false echo echo marker
Measurement Range
Near Range (2.8.1.)
Near Range programs SITRANS LR200 to ignore the zone in front of the antenna. The default setting is 0.3 m (1 ft), plus any shield length, from the sensor reference point
1)
.
Near Range allows you to increase the value from its factory default but Auto False Echo
Suppression (2.8.7.1.) is generally recommended in preference to this.
Far Range (2.8.2.)
Far Range can be used in applications where the base of the vessel is conical or parabolic. A reliable echo may be available below the vessel empty distance, due to an indirect reflection path.
Increasing Far Range to 30% or 40% can provide stable empty vessel readings.
Measurement Response
Note: Units are defined in Units (2.2.1.) and are in meters by default.
Response Rate (2.4.1.) limits the maximum rate at which the display and output respond to
changes in the measurement. There are three preset options: slow, medium, and fast.
Once the real process fill/empty rate (m/s by default) is established, a response rate can be selected that is slightly higher than the application rate. Response Rate automatically adjusts the filters that affect the output response rate.
Response Rate
(2.4.1.)
* Slow
Medium
Fast
Fill Rate (2.4.2.)/
Empty rate (2.4.3.)
0.1 m/min (0.32 ft/min)
1.0 m/min (3.28 ft/min)
10.0 m/min (32.8 ft/min)
Damping Filter
(2.2.4.)
10 s
1)
For the reference point for each configuration, see Dimensions: Uni-Construction Polypropylene
Rod Antenna on page 12 for the standard version, or
Appendix G: Flange Adapter Versions
, page 152 onwards.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 129
Damping
Damping Filter (2.2.4.) smooths out the response to a sudden change in level. This is an
exponential filter and the engineering unit is always in seconds.
In 5 time constants the output rises exponentially: from 63.2% of the change in the first time constant, to almost 100% of the change by the end of the 5th time constant.
Damping example time constant = 2 seconds input (level) change = 2 m input (level)
Time (s) smoothed output
Analog Output
The mA Output (current output) is proportional to material level in the range 4 to 20 mA.
0% and 100% are percentages of the full-scale reading (m, cm, mm, ft, in). Typically mA output is set so that 4 mA equals 0% and 20 mA equals 100%.
When SITRANS LR200 is put into PROGRAM mode (for example, by navigating through the menu) it stops updating the output of the device (local user interface and mA Output).
It stores the most recent measurement, and holds the associated readings and mA signal output. The device reverts to the parameter last addressed during the previous program session.
When the device is returned to Measurement mode, the transceiver resumes operation.
The reading and mA output default to the last measurement taken. The reading and
associated outputs migrate to the current process level at a rate controlled by Response
Rate (2.4.1.).
If the device is left in PROGRAM mode for 10 minutes without input, it automatically reverts to Measurement mode.
Two parameters affect the mA output: Operating Mode and Current Output Function.
Page 130 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Sensor Mode
This parameter controls the input. Depending on the reference point used, the mA output
reflects either Level, Space, or Distance. By default Sensor Mode is set to Level.
Operation
NO
SERVICE
Description
Measurement and associated loop current not being updated. Device defaults to Fail-safe mode a)
.
Reference point
LEVEL
SPACE
Distance to material surface
Low Calibration Point (process empty level)
High Calibration Point (process full level)
Sensor Reference Point a)
DISTANCE
See Fail-safe Mode
on page 132
.
You also have the option to put the device out of service, in which case the device defaults to Fail-safe mode, and the reported level depends on the device type. A standard device reports the last valid reading, and a NAMUR NE 43-compliant device reports the user-defined value for Material Level (3.58 mA by default).
Sensor reference point
High
Cal.
Pt.
Level
100%
20 mA
Space
Space
0%
4 mA
Distance
0%
4 mA
Distance
Level
Low
Cal.
Pt
0%
4 mA
100%
20 mA
100%
20 mA
Current Output Function
Current Output Function (2.6.1.) controls the output and applies any relevant scaling. By
default it is set to Level. Other options are Space, Distance, and Volume. (The device can carry out a volume calculation only after a vessel shape has been specified.)
When a volume application type is chosen, Sensor Mode remains as Level and the mA
Output is automatically converted to Volume.
To view the mA reading in the secondary region of the LCD, press programmer
.
on the handheld
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 131
Loss of Echo (LOE)
A loss of echo (LOE) occurs when the calculated measurement is judged to be unreliable because the echo confidence value has dropped below the echo confidence threshold.
Confidence (2.8.6.1.) describes the quality of an echo. Higher values represent higher
quality.
Echo Threshold (2.8.4.3.) defines the minimum confidence value required for an echo to
be accepted as valid and evaluated.
If the LOE condition persists beyond the time limit set in Timer (2.5.2.) the LCD displays the
Service Required icon, and the text region displays the fault code S: 0 and the text LOE.
If two faults are present at the same time, the fault code, error text, and error icon for each fault are displayed alternately. For example, Loss of Echo and Fail-safe.
S: 0 LOE S: 52 Fail-safe
Fail-safe Mode
The purpose of the Fail-safe setting is to put the process into a safe mode of operation in the event of a fault or failure. The value to be reported in the event of a fault is selected so that a loss of power or loss of signal triggers the same response as an unsafe level.
Timer (2.5.2.) determines the length of time a Loss of Echo (LOE) condition will persist
before a Fail-safe state is activated. The default setting is 10 seconds.
Material Level (2.5.1.) determines the material level to be reported when Timer (2.5.2.)
expires, depending on the device type (standard or NAMUR NE 43-compliant.)
Options
HI
LO
STANDARD DEVICE
20.5 mA (max. mA Limit)
3.8 mA (min. mA Limit)
* HOLD Last valid reading
VALUE
User-selected value defined in Level (2.5.3.)
Options
HI
LO
NAMUR NE 43-COMPLIANT DEVICE
20.5 mA (max. mA Limit)
3.8 mA (min. mA Limit)
HOLD Last valid reading
* VALUE User-selected value Level (2.5.3.), default 3.58 mA
Upon receiving a reliable echo, the loss of echo condition is aborted, the Service
Required icon and error message are cleared, and the reading and mA output return to the current material level.
Page 132 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Maximum Process Temperature Chart
WARNING: Internal temperature must not exceed 80 °C (176 °F).
Notes:
• The chart below is for guidance only.
• The chart does not represent every possible process connection arrangement. For example, it will NOT apply if you are mounting SITRANS LR200 directly on a metallic vessel surface.
• The chart does not take into consideration heating from direct sunshine exposure.
Maximum Process Temperature versus allowable ambient ambient temperature internal enclosure temperature process temperature
SITRANS LR200.
See Current Internal Temperature (3.2.1.) on page 96 to monitor the Internal Temperature.
If the internal temperature exceeds the maximum allowable limit, a sun shield or a longer nozzle may be required.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 133
Process Pressure/Temperature derating curves
WARNINGS:
• Never attempt to loosen, remove or disassemble process connection or instrument housing while vessel contents are under pressure.
• Materials of construction are chosen based on their chemical compatibility (or inertness) for general purposes. For exposure to specific environments, check with chemical compatibility charts before installing.
• The user is responsible for the selection of bolting and gasket materials which will fall within the limits of the flange and its intended use and which are suitable for the service conditions.
• Improper installation may result in loss of process pressure and/or release of process fluids and/or gases.
Notes:
• The Process Device Tag shall remain with the process pressure boundary assembly
1)
. In the event the instrument package is replaced, the Process Device Tag shall be transferred to the replacement unit.
• SITRANS LR200 units are hydrostatically tested, meeting or exceeding the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and the European
Pressure Equipment Directive.
• The serial numbers stamped in each process connection body, (flange, threaded, or sanitary), provide a unique identification number indicating date of manufacture.
Example: MMDDYY – XXX (where MM = month, DD = day, YY = year, and
XXX= sequential unit produced)
Further markings (space permitting) indicate flange configuration, size, pressure class, material, and material heat code.
1)
Pressure Equipment Directive, PED, 97/23/EC
Siemens Level Transmitters with flanged, threaded, or sanitary clamp type process mounts have no pressure-bearing housing of their own and, therefore, do not come under the Pressure Equipment Directive as pressure or safety accessories, (see EU Commission
Guideline 1/8).
1)
The process pressure boundary assembly comprises the components that act as a barrier against pressure loss from the process vessel: that is, the combination of process connection body and emitter, but normally excluding the electrical enclosure.
Page 134 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
WARNING: Never attempt to loosen, remove or disassemble process connection or instrument housing while vessel contents are under pressure.
Notes:
• Customer to provide adequate bolting and gasketing to retain vessel pressure and provide sufficient sealing.
• UHMW-PE antennas are rated to a maximum of 80C (176F) of continuous duty, however, they can be used for periods of up to 3 hours at temperatures up to 120C (248F) at 1 bar pressure.
PTFE Rod Antenna ASME Hole Pattern, 150 lb
Flat-Face Flange (constant flange thickness series)
process temperature (°C)
2”
4”
3”
6”
PTFE Rod Antenna, DN Hole Pattern, PN16
Flat-Face Flange (constant flange thickness series)
process temperature (°C)
A5E32337676
50 mm
100 mm
80 mm
150 mm
SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 135
WARNING: Never attempt to loosen, remove or disassemble process connection or instrument housing while vessel contents are under pressure.
Note: UHMW-PE antennas are rated to a maximum of 80C (176F) of continuous duty, however, they can be used for periods of up to 3 hours at temperatures up to 120C (248F) at 1 bar pressure.
PTFE Rod Antenna Threaded Connection
process temperature (°C)
1 1/2” and 2″
PTFE Rod Antenna Sanitary Connection
process temperature (°C)
Page 136 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
WARNING: Never attempt to loosen, remove or disassemble process connection or instrument housing while vessel contents are under pressure.
Notes:
• Customer to provide adequate bolting and gasketing to retain vessel pressure and provide sufficient sealing.
• UHMW-PE antennas are rated to a maximum of 80C (176F) of continuous duty, however, they can be used for periods of up to 3 hours at temperatures up to 120C (248F) at 1 bar pressure.
Horn Antenna or Waveguide, ASME Hole Pattern, 150 lb
Flat-Face Flange (constant flange thickness series)
process temperature (°C)
3”
6”
4”
8”
Horn Antenna or Wave Guide DN Hole Pattern, PN16
Flat-Face Flange (constant flange thickness series)
A5E32337676 process temperature (°C)
80 mm
150 mm
100 mm
200 mm
SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 137
WARNING: Never attempt to loosen, remove or disassemble process connection or instrument housing while vessel contents are under pressure.
Notes:
• Customer to provide adequate bolting and gasketing to retain vessel pressure and provide sufficient sealing.
• UHMW-PE antennas are rated to a maximum of 80C (176F) of continuous duty, however, they can be used for periods of up to 3 hours at temperatures up to 120C (248F) at 1 bar pressure.
PTFE Rod Antenna, DN Hole Pattern, PN16, PN40
Raised Face Flange per EN 1092-1
process temperature (°C)
PN10
PN25
PN16
PN40
Horn Antenna or Waveguide, DN Hole Pattern, PN16, PN40
Raised Face Flange per EN 1092-1
process temperature (°C)
PN10
PN25
PN16
PN40
Page 138 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Startup Behavior
• The device draws less than 3.6 mA at startup.
• Time to first measurement is less than 50 seconds
Loop power
Typical Connection Drawing
Note: Loop voltage is the voltage at the terminals of the power supply (not the voltage at the terminals of the device).
loop resistance
RL loop voltage
VL power supply
LR200 loop current IL
Allowable operating area of SITRANS LR200
Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance
Curve 1 (General Purpose, Intrinsically Safe, Non-Sparking, Non-incendive)
Loop Voltage – V
L
ALLOWABLE
OPERATING AREA
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 139
Curve 2 (Flameproof, Increased Safety, Explosion-proof)
ALLOWABLE
OPERATING AREA
Loop Voltage – V
L
Page 140 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Appendix E: Application Examples
Note: In the applications illustrated below, values are for example purposes only.
You can use these examples as setup references. Enter the values in the parameter tables to select the corresponding functions.
Configure the basic settings using the Quick Start wizard parameters. (These parameters are inter-related, and changes take effect only after you select YES to apply changes in the last step.)
In each example, after performing a Quick Start, navigate to the other required parameters either via the handheld programmer, or using a Device Management tool (SIMATIC PDM or
AMS Device Manager) and enter the appropriate values.
Liquid resin in storage vessel, level measurement
Notes:
• Minimum distance from flange face to target is limited by Near Range (2.8.1.).
• We recommend using Auto False Echo Suppression with an empty or almost empty vessel.
sensor reference point
0.5 m
High
Cal
Point
100% Level
To obtain level measurement/4 to 20 mA output proportional to resin levels:
Low Calibration Pt. = 5 m (16.5 ft) from sensor reference point
High Calibration Pt.= 0.5 m (1.64 ft) from sensor reference point
5 m
Max.fill/empty rate = 0.2 m/min (0.65 ft/min)
0% Level
Low Cal
Point
NOTE: Table continues on next page.
In the event of a loss of echo:
SITRANS LR200 is to go into Fail-safe High after 2 minutes.
Parameter type
Quick Start
Wizard parameters
Parameter No. /Name
Material (1.2.)
Response Rate (1.3.)
Units (1.4.)
Operating Mode (1.5.)
Low Calibration Point (1.6.)
High Calibration Point (1.7.)
Apply? (Apply changes) (1.8.)
Options/Values Function
LIQUID
MED
M
LEVEL
5
0.5
YES
Medium =1 m/minute meters
Level
5 m (16.5 ft)
0.5 m (1.64 ft)
Transfers Quick Start settings to device.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 141
Parameter type
Parameter No. /Name Options/Values Function (cont’d)
Independent parameters
Timer (2.5.2.)
Material Level (2.5.1.)
Auto False Echo Suppression
Range (2.8.7.2.)
Auto False Echo Suppression
(2.8.7.1.)
2
HI
Distance a)
minus
0.42 m (1.37 ft)
LEARN
2 minutes
Fail-safe level set to High
Sets length of learned
TVT b)
to use
Enables the use of learned
TVT a) b)
Distance to product from sensor reference point.
For more details see Auto False Echo Suppression Range (2.8.7.2.) on page 93 and Auto
False Echo Suppression (2.8.7.1.) on page 92.
Return to Measurement: press Mode to start normal operation.
Horizontal vessel with volume measurement
Notes:
• Minimum distance from flange face to target is limited by Near Range (2.8.1.).
• We recommend using Auto False Echo Suppression with an empty or almost empty vessel.
To obtain level measurement/4 to 20 mA output proportional to vessel volume in a chemical vessel:
Low Calibration Point = 3.5 m (11.48 ft) from sensor reference point
High Calibration Point = 0.5 m (1.64 ft) from sensor reference point
Max. fill/empty rate = 0.2 m/min (0.65 ft/min)
Select vessel shape, Parabolic Ends, and enter values for A and L, to obtain a volume reading instead of level.
In the event of a loss of echo: SITRANS LR200 is to go into Fail-safe High after 2 minutes.
sensor reference point
3.5 m 0.5 m
High
Cal
Point
100% = 8000 l
Low Cal
Point volume reading
L = 6 m
A = 0.8 m A = 0.8 m
Page 142 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Parameter type
Independent parameters
Parameter No./Name
Material (1.2.)
Response Rate (1.3.)
Units (1.4.)
Quick Start
Wizard parameters
Operating Mode (1.5.)
Low Calibration Point (1.6.)
High Calibration Point (1.7.)
Apply? (Apply changes) (1.8.)
Vessel Shape (2.7.1.1.)
Maximum Volume (2.7.1.2.)
Dimension A (2.7.1.3.)
Dimension L (2.7.1.4.)
Timer (2.5.2.)
Material Level (2.5.1.)
Auto False Echo Suppression
Range (2.8.7.2.)
Auto False Echo Suppression
(2.8.7.1.)
Options/Values Function
LIQUID
MED
M
LEVEL
3.5
0.5
Medium =1 m/minute meters
Level is reported as Volume when a vessel shape is selected.
3.5 m (11.48 ft)
0.5 m (1.64 ft)
YES
Transfers Quick Start settings to device.
PARABOLIC ENDS Defines vessel shape.
6
2
8000
0.8
HI
[Distance a)
minus
0.42 m]
LEARN
8000 liters
0.8 m (2.62 ft)
6 m (19.68 ft)
2 minutes
Fail-safe level set to High
Sets length of learned TVT curve b)
to use
Enables the use of learned TVT
curve b
.
a) b)
Distance to product from sensor reference point.
For more details see
Auto False Echo Suppression Range (2.8.7.2.)
on page 93 and
Auto
False Echo Suppression (2.8.7.1.)
on page 92.
Return to Measurement: press Mode to start normal operation.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 143
Sliding Waveguide on Anaerobic Digesters
Notes:
• Minimum distance from the flange face to the target is limited by Near Range (2.8.1.).
• We recommend adjusting Auto False Echo Suppression parameters with an empty or almost empty vessel.
This application is to obtain a level measurement and corresponding 4 to 20 mA output proportional to the sludge level on a digester.
• The raised position is for installation sensor reference point and maintenance.
• The lowered position is for operation.
• Program the instrument for operation in the lowered position.
2 m
10 m
High
Cal.
Point horn
• Low Cal. Pt. is the bottom of the digester (10 m/33 ft from sensor reference point when the instrument is lowered to its normal operating position).
• High Cal.Pt. is 2 m (6.56 ft) from sensor reference point.
• The maximum rate of filling or emptying is about 0.1 m (4″)/min.
Low
Cal.
Point
Parameter type
Quick start wizard parameters
Independent parameters
Parameter Name (number) Value
Material (1.2.)
Response Rate (1.3.)
Units (1.4.)
Operating Mode (1.5.)
Low Calibration Point (1.6.)
High Calibration Point (1.7.)
Apply? (Apply changes) (1.8.)
Timer (2.5.2.)
Material Level (2.5.1.)
10
2
YES
2
HI
LIQUID
MED
M
LEVEL
Function
1 m/min. (3.28 ft/min.) meters
Level
10 m/33 ft)
2 m (6.56 ft
)
2 minutes
Hi
Page 144 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Parameter type
Parameter Name (number) Value Function (cont’d)
Independent parameters
(cont’d)
Auto False Echo Suppression
Range (2.8.7.2.)
Auto False Echo Suppression
(2.8.7.1.)
[Distance a) minus 0.42 m]
LEARN
Sets length of learned
TVT curve b)
to use
Enables the use of
learned TVT curve b
.
a) b)
Distance to product from sensor reference point.
For more details see
Auto False Echo Suppression Range (2.8.7.2.)
on page 93 and
Auto False Echo Suppression (2.8.7.1.)
on page 92.
Return to Measurement mode: press Mode to start normal operation.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 145
Application with Stillpipe
A stillpipe is recommended for products with a dK of less than 3, or if extremely turbulent or vortex conditions exist. This mounting arrangement can also be used to provide optimum signal conditions on foaming materials.
Notes:
• Near Range (2.8.1.) (Blanking) will be set at the factory. Check the Process Device Tag for
specific values.
• Suitable pipe diameters are 40 mm (1.5”) to 100 mm (4”).
• The pipe diameter must be matched with the horn size. Use the largest horn size that will fit the stillpipe/bypass pipe (see
• See
Flanged Horn dimensions
Mounting on a Stillpipe or Bypass Pipe
on page 156).
on page 17 for installation guidelines.
This application is to obtain a level measurement and corresponding 4 to 20 mA output proportional to the oil level in a fuel storage vessel.
sensor reference point vent hole
• Low Calibration Pt. is 5 m (16.5 ft) from the sensor reference point.
• High Calibration Pt. is 0.5 m (1.65 ft) from the sensor reference point.
• The stillpipe inside diameter is
50 mm (1.96″).
• The maximum rate of filling or emptying is about 0.1 m (4″)/min.
Low
Cal.
Pt.
5 m
0.5 m
High
Cal.
Pt.
50 mm I.D.
Parameter type
Parameter No./Name
Material (1.2.)
Response Rate (1.3.)
Units (1.4.)
Quick Start
Wizard
Operating Mode (1.5.)
Low Calibration Point (1.6.)
High Calibration Point (1.7.)
Apply? (Apply changes) (1.8.)
Options/
Values
LIQUID LOW DK
MED
M
LEVEL
5
0.5
YES
Function
Medium =1 m/minute meters
Level is reported as Volume when a vessel shape is selected.
5 m (16.5 ft)
0.5 m (1.64 ft)
Transfers Quick Start settings to device.
Page 146 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
a)
Parameter type
Parameter No./Name
Independent parameters
Propagation Factor (2.8.3.) a)
Position Detect (2.8.4.2.)
CLEF Range (2.8.4.4.)
a
Options/
Values
0.990
HYBRID
4.3
Function (cont’d)
P.F. for a 50 mm (1.96″) I.D. stillpipe
4.3 m (14.10 ft)
The recommended values for the propagation factor and for CLEF range are dependent on the stillpipe diameter. Refer to the next table for values.
Propagation Factor/Stillpipe Diameter
a)
Nominal Pipe Size a)
Propagation Factor
CLEF Range (2.8.4.4.)
settings
40 mm (1.5”)
0.9828
Low Cal Pt. –
700 mm
50 mm (2”)
0.990
Low Cal Pt. –
700 mm
80 mm (3”)
0.991
Low Cal Pt. –
1000 mm
100 mm (4”)
0.9965
Low Cal Pt. –
1000 mm
Since pipe dimensions may vary slightly, the propagation factor may also vary.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 147
Appendix F: HART Communications
Highway Addressable Remote Transducer, HART, is an industrial protocol that is superimposed on the 4-20 mA signal. It is an open standard, and full details about HART can be obtained from the HART Communication Foundation at www.hartcomm.org
SITRANS LR200 can be configured over the HART network using either the HART
Communicator 375 by Fisher-Rosemount, or a software package. The recommended software package is the SIMATIC Process Device Manager (PDM) by Siemens.
SIMATIC PDM
This software package is designed to permit easy configuration, monitoring, and troubleshooting of HART devices. The HART EDD for SITRANS LR200 was written with
SIMATIC PDM in mind and has been extensively tested with this software.
For more information, see
Operating via SIMATIC PDM
on page 35.
HART Electronic Device Description (EDD)
In order to configure a HART device, the configurator must have the HART Electronic
Device Description for the instrument in question. HART EDDs are controlled by the HART
Communication Foundation. Please check with the HART Communication Foundation for the availability of the HART EDD for SITRANS LR200. Older versions of the library will have to be updated in order to use all the features of SITRANS LR200.
Page 148 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
HART Communicator 375 Menu Structure
Note: HART Communicator 375 is supported by SITRANS LR200 HART.
LEVEL METER
1.
IDENTIFICATION
1. TAG
2. DESCRIPTION
3. MESSAGE
4. INSTALLATION DATE
5. DEVICE ORDER NUMBER
2.
SETUP
1. DEVICE
1. FIRMWARE REVISION
2. LOADER REVISION
3. HARDWARE REVISION
2. INPUT
1. SENSOR CALIBRATION
1. MATERIAL
2. SENSOR UNITS
3. OPERATION
4. LOW CALIBRATION PT.
5. HIGH CALIBRATION PT.
6. NEAR RANGE
7. FAR RANGE
8. PROPAG. FACTOR
9. SENSOR OFFSET
2. VOLUME CONVERSION
1. VESSEL SHAPE
2. MAXIMUM VOLUME
3. DIMENSION A
4. DIMENSION L
3. VOLUME BREAKPOINT
1. TABLE 1 – 8 (Lev./Vol. Breakpoints 1-8)
2. TABLE 9 – 16 (Lev./Vol. Breakpoints 9-16)
3. TABLE 17 – 24 (Lev./Vol. Breakpoints 17-24)
4. TABLE 25 – 32 (Lev./Vol. Breakpoints 25-32)
4. ECHO PROCESSING
1. ECHO SELECT
1. ALGORITHM
2. POSITION DETECT
3. ECHO THRESHOLD
2. SAMPLING
1. ECHO LOCK
2. SAMPLING UP
3. SAMPLING DOWN
3. FILTERING
1. DAMPING FILTER
4. TANK BOTTOM ALGORITHM
1. CLEF RANGE
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 149
ECHO PROC (continued)
5. NOISE
1. ECHO CONFIDENCE
2. ECHO STRENGTH
3. NOISE AVERAGE
5. TVT SETUP
1. TVT HOVER LEVEL
2. AUTO FALSE ECHO SUPPRESSION
3. AUTO SUPPRESSION RANGE
4. SHAPER MODE
6. TVT SHAPER
1. SHAPER 1-9 (Shaper Points 1-9)
2. SHAPER 10-18 (Shaper Points 10-18)
3. SHAPER 19-27 (Shaper Points 19-27)
4. SHAPER 28-36 (Shaper Points 28-36)
5. SHAPER 37-40 (Shaper Points 37-40)
7. RATE
1. RESPONSE RATE
2. FILL RATE PER MINUTE
3. EMPTY RATE PER MINUTE
3. OUTPUT
1. MA OUTPUT
1. MA OUTPUT FUNCTION
2. 4 MA SETPOINT
3. 20 MA SETPOINT
4. MINIMUM MA LIMIT
5. MAXIMUM MA LIMIT
4. FAIL-SAFE
1. FAILSAFE TIMER
2. FAILSAFE MATERIAL LEVEL
3. FAILSAFE LEVEL
3.
DIAGNOSTICS
1. MEASURED VALUES
1. CURRENT INTERNAL TEMP.
2. MAX. INTERNAL TEMP.
3. MIN. INTERNAL TEMP.
4.
SERVICE
1. REMAINING DEVICE LIFETIME
1. TOTAL EXPECTED DEVICE LIFE
2. TOTAL DEVICE OPERATING TIME
3. REMAINING DEVICE LIFETIME
4. MAINTENANCE ALERT ACTIVATION
5. MAINTENANCE REQUIRED LIMIT
6. MAINTENANCE DEMANDED LIMIT
7. DEVICE LIFETIME MAINTENANCE ACKNOWLEDGE
2. REMAINING SENSOR LIFETIME
1. TOTAL EXPECTED SENSOR LIFE
2. TOTAL SENSOR OPERATING TIME
3. REMAINING SENSOR LIFETIME
4. MAINTENANCE ALERT ACTIVATION
5. MAINTENANCE REQUIRED LIMIT
6. MAINTENANCE DEMANDED LIMIT
7. SENSOR LIFETIME MAINTENANCE ACKNOWLEDGE
Page 150 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
3. SERVICE INTERVAL
1. TOTAL SERVICE INTERVAL
2. TIME ELAPSED SINCE LAST SERVICE
3. REMAINING LIFETIME
4. MAINTENANCE ALERT ACTIVATION
5. MAINTENANCE REQUIRED LIMIT
6. MAINTENANCE DEMANDED LIMIT
7. SERVICE ACKNOWLEDGE
4. CALIBRATION INTERVAL
1. TOTAL CALIBRATION INTERVAL
2. TIME ELAPSED SINCE LAST CALIBRATION
3. REMAINING LIFETIME
4. MAINTENANCE ALERT ACTIVATION
5. MAINTENANCE REQUIRED LIMIT
6. MAINTENANCE DEMANDED LIMIT
7. CALIBRATION ACKNOWLEDGE
5. POWERED DAYS
6. POWER-ON RESETS
7. LCD FAST MODE
8. LCD CONTRAST
5.
COMMUNICATION
1. COMM. CONTROL
6.
SECURITY
1. WRITE PROTECT
2. PIN TO UNLOCK
7.
LANGUAGE
1. LANGUAGE
HART Version
SITRANS LR200 conforms to HART rev. 5.
Burst Mode
SITRANS LR200 does not support burst mode.
HART Multidrop Mode
We do not recommend the use of HART Multidrop Mode.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 151
Appendix G: Flange Adapter Versions
Dimensions:
Threaded connection, PTFE Rod
WARNING: For pressure applications, it will be necessary to use PTFE tape or other appropriate thread sealing compound, and to tighten the process connection beyond hand-tight.
Notes:
• Process temperature and pressure capabilities are dependent upon information on the process device tag. Reference drawing listed on the tag is available on the product page of our website at: www.siemens.com/LR200, under More Info/Installation drawings/Level
Measurement/Installation Drawings/LR200.
• Additional information on process connections is available on the Installation Drawings page under Process Connection Diagrams.
nameplate locking ring process device tag stainless steel mounting thread
187 mm
7.4″
* sensor reference point
PTFE rod antenna
412 mm (16.3″)
* 17 mm (0.67″)
Page 152 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
PTFE Rod Antenna, Flat-Face
1)
Flange
Notes:
• Process temperature and pressure capabilities are dependent upon information on the process device tag. Reference drawing listed on the tag is available on the product page of our website at: www.siemens.com/LR200, under More Info/Installation drawings/Level
Measurement/Installation Drawings/LR200.
• Additional information on process connections is available on the Installation Drawings page under Process Connection Diagrams.
• For other flange dimensions and bolt hole sizing see page 163.
Flat-Face Flange Dimensions
on
nameplate locking ring process device tag
187 mm
7.4″
* sensor reference point
PTFE rod antenna
412 mm (16.3″)
*Flange thickness: FF (flat-face) = 20 mm (0.80″) nominal
RF (raised-face): thickness depends on flange size. See
Dimensions
on page 161
.
Raised-Face Flange
1)
Constant thickness series.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 153
Threaded Connection
,
PTFE Rod, external shield
WARNING: For pressure applications, it will be necessary to use PTFE tape or other appropriate thread sealing compound, and to tighten the process connection beyond hand-tight.
Notes:
• Process temperature and pressure capabilities are dependent upon information on the process device tag. Reference drawing listed on the tag is available on the product page of our website at: www.siemens.com/LR200, under More Info/Installation drawings/Level
Measurement/Installation Drawings/LR200.
• Additional information on process connections is available on the Installation Drawings page under Process Connection Diagrams.
locking ring nameplate process device tag stainless steel mounting thread stainless steel antenna shield
(inactive length) active antenna
Shield
Length
SL
187 mm
7.4″
* sensor reference point
Overall
Length
L
SL = min. 100 mm (4″), customer-specified
L = 374 mm (14.7″) plus shield length
* 17 mm (0.67″)
Page 154 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Flat-Face extension
1)
2)
Flange with Horn Antenna and Waveguide
Notes:
• For other flange dimensions and bolt hole sizing see page 163 or
• See
Raised-Face Flange Dimensions
on page 161.
Flanged Horn dimensions
Flat-Face Flange Dimensions
on
on page 156 for more details.
• Process temperature and pressure capabilities are dependent upon information on the process device tag. Reference drawing listed on the tag is available on the product page of our website at: www.siemens.com/LR200, under More Info/Installation drawings/Level
Measurement/Installation Drawings/LR200.
• Additional information on process connections is available on the Installation Drawings page under Process Connection Diagrams.
• Optional waveguide extensions and/or purging2) system can be installed between the flange and the antenna.
50 mm
(2.0″)
1/2″ NPT cable entry
(or alternatively, M20 cable gland) threaded cover
154 mm
(6.1″) enclosure/ electronics
187 mm
(7.40″) sensor reference point
*
80 mm (3.0″) dia. horn antenna
131 mm
(5.2″)
226 mm
(9.0″)
100 mm
(4.0″) nom.
150 mm
(6.0″) nom.
200 mm
(8.0″) nom.
* Flange thickness: 20 mm (0.80″) nominal
325 mm
(12.80″) process device tag
185 mm
(7.3″) flange waveguide extensions
100 mm (4.00″) to
300 mm (12.0″)
(optional)
1)
2)
Constant thickness series.
A purging system is an option available for this antenna type. This provides an inlet on the flange where cooling air or cleaning fluid may be supplied. The air or liquid passes through the flange and exits the inside of the horn to clean the antenna system.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 155
Flanged Horn dimensions
Notes:
• Signal amplitude increases with horn diameter, so use the largest practical size.
• 80 mm (3″) and 100 mm (4″) are not recommended in vessels due to the wide beam/ poor performance. They are to be used in stillpipe applications only.
Nominal Horn Size Horn O.D.
100 mm (4”)
150 mm (6”)
200 mm (8”)
95.3 mm (3.75”)
146.0 mm (5.75”)
199.4 mm (7.85”) a) b)
Height to sensor reference point a)
131.0 mm (5.16”)
225.8 mm (8.89”)
325.1 mm (12.79”)
Beam Angle b)
29 degrees
20 degrees
17 degrees
Measurement
Range
20 m (65.6 ft)
Height from bottom of horn to sensor reference point as shown: see
Flat-Face
Flange with Horn Antenna and Waveguide extension on page 155,
Raised Face or Flat-Face Flange with Waveguide
on page 157, or
Sliding Waveguide Configuration on page 158.
– 3dB in the direction of the polarization axis (see Polarization reference point
on page 17 for an illustration).
Page 156 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Raised Face
1)
or Flat-Face
2)
Flange with Waveguide
Notes:
• For other flange dimensions and bolt hole sizing see page 163 or
Flat-Face Flange Dimensions
on
Raised-Face Flange Dimensions
on page 161.
• You can connect a maximum of two waveguides together.
• This option is recommended only for clean liquids on vessels without agitators or turbulence.
• Horizontal stress on this antenna must be avoided, otherwise mechanical support may be required.
• Process temperature and pressure capabilities are dependent upon information on the process device tag. Reference drawing listed on the tag is available on the product page of our website at: www.siemens.com/LR200, under More Info/Installation drawings/Level
Measurement/Installation Drawings/LR200.
• Additional information on process connections is available on the Installation Drawings page under Process Connection Diagrams.
nameplate
187 mm (7.4”) locking ring process device tag sensor reference point diameter
80 mm (3.0”)
57.2 mm
(2.250”)
*
20 mm (0.8”) variable min: 100 mm (4″) max: 3000 mm (123″) waveguide
* Flange thickness: See Raised-Face
Flange Dimensions
or on page 163
.
on page 161
Flat-Face Flange Dimensions
1)
2)
Per EN-1092-1.
Constant thickness series.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 157
Sliding Waveguide Configuration
Notes:
• Always clamp the instrument in the same position for operation.
• For other flange dimensions and bolt hole sizing see page 163.
Flat-Face Flange Dimensions
on
• Maximum pressure 0.5 bar at 60° C (140° F) for sliding flange option.
• Process temperature and pressure capabilities are dependent upon information on the process device tag. Reference drawing listed on the tag is available on the product page of our website at: www.siemens.com/LR200, under More Info/Installation drawings/Level
Measurement/Installation Drawings/LR200.
• Additional information on process connections is available on the Installation Drawings page under Process Connection Diagrams.
nameplate locking ring process device tag
187 mm
(7.4″)
40 mm (1.6″) sensor reference point
(See sliding flange
Flat-Face Flange
Dimensions
on page
163
)
1000 mm
(40.8″)
100 mm
(4″)
150 mm
(6″)
200 mm
(8″)
Page 158 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
131.0 mm
(5.16″)
225.8 mm
(8.89″)
325.1 mm
(12.8″)
A5E32337676
Sanitary connection, Rod Antenna, PTFE or HDPE
Notes:
• Process temperature and pressure capabilities are dependent upon information on the process device tag. Reference drawing listed on the tag is available on the product page of our website at: www.siemens.com/LR200, under More Info/
Installation drawings/Level Measurement/Installation Drawings/LR200.
• Additional information on process connections is available on the Installation
Drawings page under Process Connection Diagrams.
nameplate ferrule (optional) materials:
SS304 standard
SS316 optional clamp
(optional) locking ring
2″, 3″, or 4″ sanitary fitting ferrule with integral gasket process device tag
187 mm
(7.4”)
20 mm (0.8″)
PTFE or HDPE rod antenna
(1-piece construction) sensor reference point
406 mm (16”) nominal
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 159
Raised-Face Flange per EN 1092-1
enclosure mounting hole (4) bolt hole enclosure mounting hole circle diameter 86.36 mm (3.40″) bolt hole circle dia.
angle of adjacent bolt holes section A — A flange
O.D.
center hub facing dia.
flange thickness facing height
3 mm
100°
120° antenna mounting hole (3)
Page 160 antenna mounting hole circle diameter 66.04 mm (2.60″) process side
SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Raised-Face Flange Dimensions
Pipe size
Flange bolt hole pattern
DN80 PN10/PN16
DN100 PN10/PN16
DN150 PN10/PN16
DN200 PN10/PN16
DN80 PN25/PN40
DN100 PN25/PN40
DN150 PN25/PN40
Flange
O.D.
(mm)
Bolt Hole
Circle Ø
(mm)
Bolt Hole
Ø (mm)
No. of
Bolts
Angle of adjacent bolt holes
200 160 18 8 45
220 180 18 8
285 240 22 8
340 295 22 12
45
45
30
200 160 18 8
235 190 22 8
300 250 26 8
45
45
45
Facing
Ø (mm)
Thickness
(mm)
138 20
158
212
268
20
22
24
138 24
162 24
218 28
Raised-Face
1)
Flange markings
Flange Standard; Nominal Size; Material;
Heat Code
EN 1092-1 05 ’B1’; ’DN80’ ’PN16’ ’1.4404 or 1.4435’
A1B2C3
Serial no. mmddyyxxx
Logo
Heat
Code no.
A1B2C3 RF
The flange markings are located around the outside edge of the flange.
Serial number: a unique number allotted to each flange, including the date of manufacture (MMDDYY) followed by a number from 001 to 999.
Flange series: the Siemens Milltronics drawing identification.
Heat code: a flange material batch code identification.
Facing
1)
Per EN 1092-1.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 161
Flat-Face Flange (constant thickness series)
See
Flat-Face Flange Dimensions
on page 163 for details.
bolt hole enclosure mounting hole (4)
(threaded) bolt hole circle flange O.D.
20 mm (0.80″) nominal antenna mounting hole (3)
(threaded) bolt hole circle dia.
process side
Page 162 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Flat-Face
1)
Flange Dimensions
Pipe size
a)
Flange Size Flange O.D.
3”
4”
6”
8”
DN50
DN80
DN100
DN150
DN200
DN200
DN50
DN80
DN100
DN150
DN200
50A
80A
100A
150A
200A
4”
6”
2”
3”
8”
2”
ASME 150 lb
ASME 150 lb
ASME 150 lb
ASME 150 lb
ASME 150 lb
ASME 300 lb a)
ASME 300 lb
ASME 300 lb
PN40
PN40
PN40
JIS 10K
JIS 10K
JIS 10K
JIS 10K
JIS 10K
ASME 300 lb
ASME 300 lb
PN16
PN16
PN16
PN16
PN16
PN25
PN40
PN40
6.0”
7.5”
9.0”
11.0”
13.5”
6.50”
8.25”
10.00”
12.50”
15.00”
165 mm
200 mm
220 mm
285 mm
340 mm
360 mm
165 mm
200 mm
235 mm
300 mm
375 mm
155 mm
185 mm
210 mm
280 mm
330 mm
Due to the limited space on this flange, SITRANS LR200 can only use 4 of the standard 8 bolt holes of the 2” ASME 300 lb size.
.7”
.75”
.75”
.88”
.88”
.75”
Bolt Hole
Ø
Number of Bolts
8
8
4
4
8
12
12
8
8
4
8
4
8
12
12
4a)
8
8
8
12
8
8
12
4
8
8
.88”
.88”
.88”
1.00”
18 mm
18 mm
18 mm
22 mm
22 mm
26 mm
18 mm
18 mm
22 mm
26 mm
30 mm
19 mm
19 mm
19 mm
23 mm
23 mm
Bolt Hole
Circle Ø
4.75”
6.0”
7.50”
9.50”
11.75”
5.00”
6.62”
7.88”
10.62”
13.00”
125 mm
160 mm
180 mm
240 mm
295 mm
310 mm
125 mm
160 mm
190 mm
250 mm
320 mm
120 mm
150 mm
175 mm
240 mm
290 mm
1)
Constant thickness series.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 163
Flat-Face
1)
Flange markings
Flange markings located around the outside edge of the flat-face flange identify the flange assembly on which the device is mounted.
Serial No.
MMDDYYXXX
Flat Face Flange Identification
Logo
Flange Series
25556
2 150
DN 80 PN16
Material
Heat
Code
316L/ 1.4404 or
316L/ 1.4435
A1B2C3
Welded Assembly
Identification
Flange
Series
25546
Heat Code
No.
A1B2C3
Serial number: a unique number allotted to each flange, including the date of manufacture
(MMDDYY) followed by a number from 001 to 999.
Flange series: the Siemens Milltronics drawing identification.
Nominal size: the flange size followed by the hole pattern for a particular flange class. For
Material: example,
– a 2 inch ANSI B 16.5 150 lb class flange (North America)
– a DN 80 EN 1092-1 PN16 class flange (Europe).
the basic flange material (AISI or EU material designation). North American material codes are followed by European ones. For example, material designation 316L/1.4404.
Heat code: a flange material batch code identification.
Threaded Connection Markings
Threaded connection markings are found on the flat face/faces of the process connection.
Logo Serial Number Thread Size
MMDDYYXXX
1.5
Thread Series
NPT
BSP
G/PF
Serial number:a unique number allotted to each flange, including the date of manufacture
(MMDDYY) followed by a number from 001 to 999.
1)
Constant thickness series.
Page 164 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Flange Mounting Instructions
Notes:
• The integral process seal MUST rest on the customer-supplied flange (see the detail below).
• The straight/taper transition of the rod should extend past the nozzle/vessel opening. Add extensions as required
1)
.
1)
wiring access cover process device tag
1/2″ NPT or M20 x 1.5
cable entry locking ring customer-flanged nozzle to suit vessel minimum diameter
2″ / DIN 50 customer-supplied flange integral process seal nozzle/vessel juncture straight/taper transition
* Refer to the
Rod Extension Requirements
table on page 166.
1)
Refer to the
Rod Extension Requirements
table on page 166
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 165
Rod Assembly
WARNING: For pressure applications, it will be necessary to use PTFE tape or other appropriate thread sealing compound, and to tighten the process connection beyond hand-tight.
Optional
Extension
100 mm
(4″)
50 mm
(2”)
Notes:
• Water or process fluids must not enter the connecting threads: this could cause reflections at the connection, which will appear as false echoes.
• Apply a small amount of PTFE paste to the antenna threads before threading the antenna together, and tighten slowly. Ensure that the rod sections mate securely with no gaps.
Do not apply too much PTFE paste or the parts will not mate securely.
• Do not use wrenches or pliers. Hand tighten only (except in pressure applications: see warning above).
PTFE paste is supplied with PTFE rod antenna versions (non-sanitary type)
Rod Extension Requirements
a) b)
Nozzle I.D.
50 mm (2”)
80 mm (3”)
100 mm (4”)
150 mm (6”)
>150 mm (6”)
Nozzle Height
a)
mm (inches)
<100 (4) 100 to 150 (4 to 6) 150 to 200 (6 to
Application not recommended for 50 mm (2”) I.D. nozzles longer than 100 mm (4”) b)
.
extension not required
50 mm
50 mm
50 mm extension not required
100 mm
100 mm
100 mm
Consult Siemens Milltronics for assistance with nozzle sizes not listed.
Shielded rod antennas are available for these applications.
Page 166 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Mounting Guidelines
Nozzle fabrication
Weld seams must be on the outside of the nozzle. Seams or lips on the inside of the nozzle may cause erratic readings.
Nozzle design
• The nozzle should be as short as possible.
• If your application requires a nozzle longer than our recommended maximum length consider using a shielded rod.
Max. nozzle height:
100 mm (4″)
Horn Antennas
The end of the horn should protrude a minimum of 10 mm (0.4”) to avoid interference from the nozzle.
10 mm (0.4″)
Threaded Rod Antenna
WARNING: For pressure applications, it is necessary to use PTFE tape or other appropriate thread sealing compound, and to tighten the process connection beyond hand-tight.
1.5” or 2” threaded process connections are available in three thread types:
NPT, BSP, and G.
Max. nozzle height
100 mm (4″)
316 S.S.
PTFE min. I.D.
100 mm (4″)
For smaller diameters use a shielded rod
Sanitary Rod Antenna
2”, 3”, and 4” sanitary fitting ferrule with integral gasket, with rod antenna sanitary fitting ferrule
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 167
Waveguide Antenna
Notes:
• You can connect a maximum of two waveguides together.
• This option is recommended only for clean liquids, and only on vessels without an agitator, with no turbulence.
• Horizontal stress on this antenna must be avoided, otherwise mechanical support may be required.
• Process temperature and pressure capabilities are dependent upon information on the process device tag. The reference drawing listed on the tag can be downloaded from our website at: www.siemens.com/LR200.
vent hole minimum
80 mm (3″)
• Recommended for products with a dK lower than 3.
•
See Propagation Factor (2.8.3.) on page 87 for the
related propagation factor.
Horn with Waveguide Extensions
• Recommended for long nozzles with a small diameter.
For example, if the nozzle is 100 mm (4”) in diameter and 460 mm (18”) in length), the rod antenna is not suitable due to interference from the nozzle.
• Waveguide extensions are available in custom lengths.
• The horn must be connected to the
SITRANS LR200 process flange.
If horn diameter is too large for the nozzle opening, insert it from inside the vessel.
Page 168 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Appendix H: Firmware Revision History
Firmware
Rev.
1.00
1.01
PDM
EDD
Rev.
1.00
1.02
1.03
1.04
2.00
2.00
Date Changes
6 May 2003
26 Jun 2003
16 Oct 2003
16 Mar 2004
27 May 2004
• Initial Release
• Factory calibration of antenna offset can now be saved.
• Sporadic Fault 25 (electronic failure) messages reduced.
• Cleaned up fault code issues.
• Set HART status bit 4 (more status available)
• MEASURE key works only on restricted set of parameters while in program mode.
• Made corrections to language strings.
• Corrected User Interface operation at –30 o
C.
• Fixed Fault 25 (electronic failure) caused by an
RTM glitch on the RAMP_TH line.
• PDM TVT profile was sometimes lacking a few bytes at the end. This is now fixed.
• Added TVT Shaper to HART: P831 to cmd 172 and create cmd 174 for P832.
• Improved mA output time at startup.
• Product startup time reduced from about 30 seconds to about 10 seconds.
• P838 now does not reset.
• P831 and P832 TVT shaper added.
• P054 and P054 breakpoints corrected for PDM.
• Fixed possible corruption of HART Status.
• Prevent possible buffer overflows.
• Fixed HART command 17 to correct status information.
• Changes made to the program mode timer to avoid an immediate timeout followed by a switch to run mode when the device is switched into program mode via HART.
• The configuration changed status can now be saved for the duration of a power cycle.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 169
Firmware
Rev.
1.04
(cont’d)
PDM
EDD
Rev.
2.00
(cont’d)
1.05
3.02
4.01.00
4.02.00
4.02.02
3.02.01
4.01.02
4.02.00
4.02.02
Date Changes (cont’d)
27 May 2004
10 Aug 2004
27 Feb 2006
• HART commands 170 and 171 modified to read and write P713.
• Configuration status now being set for all required commands.
• HART common practice and universal commands now return response codes.
• When the full configuration is transferred to a unit, Span is reset to the default value.
• HART command 225 now sets the manual Span flag when P007 is set.
• Added new HART command 229 to provide a write for P799.
• Corrected issue: P210 and P211 values (or
HART values for URV/LRV) were not being preserved over a power cycle if operation was set to distance or volume.
• Resolved issue that could cause peak to be selected below the TVT curve.
• MP&F parameters added to device.
• Fault system upgraded to use S# codes to match PROFIBUS products.
• Increased number of level/volume breakpoints to 32.
• Improved linearity over ambient temperature.
NOTE: Software revision 3.02 is not backwards compatible due to hardware compatibility.
22 Feb 2008 • New Local User Interface
2 Apr 2009
• AMS EDD Rev. 1.01.01
• Support NAMUR NE 43.
• Harmonization of menu structures and parameter names across products.
• Display indicates progress towards first measurement.
16 Jun 2010
• Display contrast improvement.
• Antenna type parameter cannot be modified.
Page 170 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Glossary
accuracy: degree of conformity of a measure to a standard or a true value.
agitator: mechanical apparatus for mixing or aerating. A device for creating turbulence.
algorithm: a prescribed set of well-defined rules or processes for the solution of a problem in a finite number of steps.
ambient temperature: the temperature of the surrounding air that comes in contact with the enclosure of the device.
antenna: an aerial which sends out and receives a signal in a specific direction. There are four basic types of antenna in radar level measurement, horn, parabolic, rod, and waveguide.
attenuation: a term used to denote a decrease in signal magnitude in transmission from one point to another. Attenuation may be expressed as a scalar ratio of the input magnitude to the output magnitude or in decibels.
Auto False-Echo Suppression: a technique used to adjust the level of a TVT to avoid the reading of false echoes. (See TVT.)
Auto False-Echo Suppression Distance: defines the endpoint of the TVT distance. (See TVT.)
This is used in conjunction with auto false echo suppression.
beam width: the angle diametrically subtended by the one-half power limits (-3 dB) of the microwave beam.
beam spreading: the divergence of a beam as it travels through a medium. blanking: a blind zone extending away from the reference point plus any additional shield length.The instrument is programmed to ignore this zone.
capacitance: the property of a system of conductors and dielectrics that permits the storage of electricity when potential differences exist between the conductors. Its value is expressed as the ratio of a quantity of electricity to a potential difference, and the unit is a
Farad. confidence: see Echo Confidence damping: term applied to the performance of an instrument to denote the manner in which the measurement settles to its steady indication after a change in the value of the level.
dB (decibel): a unit used to measure the amplitude of signals.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 171
derating: to decrease a rating suitable for normal conditions according to guidelines specified for different conditions. dielectric: a nonconductor of direct electric current.
1) dielectric constant (dK): the ability of a dielectric to store electrical potential energy under the influence of an electric field. Also known as Relative Permittivity. An increase in the dielectric constant is directly proportional to an increase in signal amplitude. The value is usually given relative to a vacuum /dry air: the dielectric constant of air is 1
1
.
echo: a signal that has been reflected with sufficient magnitude and delay to be perceived in some manner as a signal distinct from that directly transmitted. Echoes are frequently measured in decibels relative to the directly transmitted signal.
Echo Confidence: describes the quality of an echo. Higher values represent higher quality.
Echo Threshold defines the minimum value required for an echo to be accepted as valid and evaluated.
Echo Lock Window: a window centered on an echo in order to locate and display the echo’s position and true reading. Echoes outside the window are not immediately processed.
Echo Marker: a marker that points to the processed echo.
Echo Processing: the process by which the radar unit determines echoes.
Echo Strength: describes the strength of the selected echo in dB referred to 1 V rms.
Echo Profile: a graphical display of a processed echo.
false echo: any echo which is not the echo from the desired target. Generally, false echoes are created by vessel obstructions.
frequency: the number of periods occurring per unit time. Frequency may be stated in cycles per second.
Hertz (Hz): unit of frequency, one cycle per second. 1 Gigahertz (GHz) is equal to 10
9
Hz.
HART: Highway Addressable Remote Transducer. An open communication protocol used to address field instruments. horn antenna: a conical, horn-shaped antenna which focuses microwave signals. The larger the horn diameter, the more focused the radar beam.
inductance: the property of an electric circuit by virtue of which a varying current induces an electromotive force in that circuit or in a neighboring circuit. The unit is a Henry.
microwaves: the term for the electromagnetic frequencies occupying the portion of the radio frequency spectrum from 1 GHz to 300 GHz.
1)
Many conductive liquids/electrolytes exhibit dielectric properties; the relative dielectric constant of water is 80.
Page 172 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
multiple echoes: secondary echoes that appear as double, triple, or quadruple echoes in the distance from the target echo.
Near Blanking: see Blanking nozzle: a length of pipe mounted onto a vessel that supports the flange. parameters: in programming, variables that are given constant values for specific purposes or processes.
polarization: the property of a radiated electromagnetic wave describing the time-varying direction and amplitude of the electric field vector.
polarization error: the error arising from the transmission or reception of an electromagnetic wave having a polarization other than that intended for the system.
propagation factor (pf): where the maximum velocity is 1.0, pf is a value that represents a reduction in propagation velocity as a result of the wave travelling through a pipe or medium.
pulse radar: a radar type that directly measures distance using short microwave pulses.
Distance is determined by the return transit time.
radar: radar is an acronym for RAdio Detection And Ranging. A device that radiates electromagnetic waves and utilizes the reflection of such waves from distant objects to determine their existence or position.
range: distance between a transmitter and a target.
range extension: the distance below the zero percent or empty point in a vessel. relative humidity: the ratio of the actual amount of moisture in the atmosphere to the maximum amount of moisture the atmosphere could hold (which varies depending on the air temperature).
relative permittivity: see dielectric constant.
repeatability: the closeness of agreement among repeated measurements of the same variable under the same conditions.
sensor value: the value produced by the echo processing which represents the distance from
sensor reference point to the target. (see Sensor Mode (2.2.2.) on page 76 for an
illustration).
shot: one transmit pulse or measurement.
speed of light: the speed of electromagnetic waves (including microwave and light) in free space. Light speed is a constant 299, 792, 458 meters per second.
stillpipe: a pipe that is mounted inside a vessel parallel to the vessel wall, and is open to the vessel at the bottom.
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 173
stilling-well: see stillpipe.
two wire radar: a low-energy radar. Can be loop powered, analog, intrinsically safe 4 to 20 mA, or a digital (BUS) transmitter.
TVT (Time Varying Threshold): a time-varying curve that determines the threshold level above which echoes are determined to be valid.
waveguide antenna: a hollow, metallic tube that transmits a microwave signal to the product target.
Page 174 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
Index
A
Abbreviations and Identifications list
4
access control remote access
111
activating SITRANS LR200
26
agitator blade detection avoiding
90
AMS Device Manager features
56
analog output explanation
130
fail signal
7
select
51
signal range
7
simulate via PDM
52
analog output scale setup
81
antenna replacement
123
approvals
9
Auto False Echo Suppression
128
explanation
128
setup
92
setup via PDM
48
B
beam angle values
156
beam angle spread
16
bypass pipe installation
17
C
cables requirements
19
Calibration Interval
106
cleaning instructions
123
CLEF (Constrained Leading Edge Fit) explanation
126
CLEF range setup
89
communication load
7
max. line length
7
conduits requirements
19
A5E32337676 configuration new device via PDM
37
Quick Start via LUI
31
configuration flag reset
52
D
Damping explanation
130
Damping Filter setup
77
data logging time-based echo profile storage
46
Device Address
111
setting via LUI
34
Device Description see Electronic Device Description
148
Device Reset
96
device reset see Master Reset
96
device status view via PDM
54
Diagnostics
95
dimensions flanges
161
horn antenna
157
PTFE threaded rod antenna
152
sanitary rod antenna
159
threaded horn
12
Uni-construction Polypropylene Rod
Antenna
12
waveguide
157
E
echo confidence parameter setup
91
echo processing
Process Intelligence
124
process intelligence
124
echo profile data logging
46
view via LUI
33
view via PDM
54
Echo Profile Utilities
45
echo selection
Algorithm
125
CLEF (Constrained Leading Edge Fit)
126
Position algorithm
125
time varying threshold (TVT)
125
SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 175
Echo setup quick access
50
EDD
Electronic Device Description
37
edit mode handheld programmer
29
key functions
30
Electronic Device Description
148
Electronic Device Description (EDD)
37
emission cone illustration
16
enclosure opening
19
F
factory defaults
Master Reset
96
Fail-safe settings
80
Fail-safe Mode explanation
132
Fail-safe Timer explanation
132
false echo see Auto False Echo Suppression
128
Far Range explanation
129
setup
87
flange marking
164
flange markings
161
flange sizes chart
161 ,
163
function keys measurement mode
27
navigation mode
29
H
handheld programmer edit mode
29
measurement mode
27
navigation
29
HART multidrop mode
151
HART communication set preambles
52
HART Communications details
148
HART version
7
hazardous area installations wiring requirements
21
I
Identifications and Abbreviations
Page 176 list
4
Index
175
installation enclosure rotating
18
hazardous area requirements
21
temperature guidelines
16
vessel shape notes
15
internal temperature monitoring
133
K
key functions edit mode
30
L
Language
112
LCD display contrast adjustment
110
echo profile viewing
33
fast mode
109
measurement mode
26
level application example via LUI
33
lid-lock set screw
19
linearization via PDM
41
linearization via AMS
60
Local User Interface (LUI)
26
locking ring
18
LOE
Fail-safe Mode
132
loop test simulate analog output
52
Loss of Echo (LOE) explanation
132
LUI (Local User Interface)
26
M
mA output select analog output
51
maintenance calibration schedules via PDM
50
cleaning
123
service schedules via PDM
50
maintenance settings
95
see Calibration Interval
106
see Remaining Sensor Lifetime
102
see Service Interval
103
Master Reset factory defaults
96
factory defaults via AMS
58
measurement range blanking via Near Range
129
SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
extension via Far Range
129
Measurement Response explanation
129
mounting bypass requirements
17
flange mounting instructions
165
flange-mounted options
167
handheld programmer access
15
manhole cover
15
nozzle design
15
nozzle location
15
on vessel with obstructions
17
stillpipe requirements
17
sunshield recommended
16
multidrop mode
151
N
Near Range setup
87
O
operating principles
124
P
password protection via AMS
68
via PDM
54
performance specifications
6
PIN to unlock local access
112
pipe sizes flange mounting
161
,
163
polarization reference point
17
power
6
power source requirements
19
principles of operation
124
Process Intelligence
124
process temperature maximum
133
programmer handheld
27
programming adjust parameters via PDM
44
via the handheld programmer
28
propagation factor values
87
Q
Quick Start Wizard via LUI
31
via SIMATIC PDM
37
A5E32337676
R
reading erratic troubleshooting
122
reading incorrect repair troubleshooting
121
reset antenna replacement
123
see Master Reset
96
Response Rate explanation
129
settings
78
rod assembly
166
rod extension requirements
166
S
Scan Device synchronize parameters via AMS
58
security local access
112
local access control via AMS
66
local access unlock value
112
password protection via AMS
68
password protection via PDM
54
,
55
remote access control
111
remote access control via AMS
66
self-test device self-test via PDM
51
sensor reference point flanged horn
13
settings adjust parameters via LUI
28
,
29
adjust parameters via PDM
44
sidepipe see bypass pipe
17
SIMATIC PDM functions and features
35
Rev. 5.2, SP1 features
36
Rev. 6.0, SP3 features
35
simulate analog output loop test
52
specifications
6
ambient temperature
8
antenna
7
enclosure
7
environmental
8
performance
6
power
6
pressure
9
process connections
7
process temperature
9
SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 177
weight
7
startup transition screen
26
startup curve
140
stillpipe installation
17
stillpipe application configuring via PDM
43
synchronize parameters scan device via AMS
58
T
technical support contact information
3
temperature de-Rating curves
134
terminal access
19
test loop test
52
threaded connection markings
161 ,
164
trend view trend line
53
troubleshooting communication
115
operation
121
TVT (time varying threshold) explanation
125
TVT Shaper manual adjustment via PDM
47
U
unlock value local access
112
uploads/downloads accelerated
84
,
94
V
vessel shape installation notes
15
selection
83
W
wear wiring view via PDM
55
cables
19
connecting HART
20
hazardous areas
21
terminal access
19
write protect local access
112
Page 178 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
LCD menu structure
SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 179 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
LCD menu structure
Notes:
• In Navigation mode ARROW keys navigate the menu in the direction of the arrow..
• See
Parameter Reference instructions.
on page 74 for detailed information and
LEVEL METER
1. QUICK START
1.1 LANGUAGE
1.2 MATERIAL
1.3 RESPONSE RATE
1.4 UNITS
1.5 OPERAT. MODE
1.6 LOW CALIB. PT.
1.7 HIGH CALIB. PT.
1.8 APPLY?
2. SETUP
2.1 DEVICE
2.1.1
HARDWARE REV
2.1.2
FIRMWARE REV
2.1.3
LOADER REV
2.1.4
ORDER OPTION
2.2 SENSOR
2.2.1 UNITS
2.2.2 SENSOR MODE
2.2.3 MATERIAL
2.2.4 DAMPING FILTER
2.2.5 ANTENNA
2.3 CALIBRATION
2.3.1
LOW CALIB. PT.
2.3.2 HIGH CALIB. PT.
2.3.3 SENSOR OFFSET
2.4 RATE
2.4.1 RESPONSE RATE
2.4.2 FILL RATE /MIN
2.4.3 EMPTY RATE /MIN
2.5 FAIL-SAFE
2.5.1 MATERIAL LEVEL
2.5.2 TIMER
2.5.3 LEVEL
2.6 ANALOG OUT. SCAL.
2.6.1 CURR. OUT. FUNC.
2.6.2 4 MA SETPOINT
2.6.3 20 MA SETPOINT
2.6.4 MIN. MA LIMIT
2.6.5 MAX. MA LIMIT
2.6.6 MA OUTPUT VALUE
2.7 LINEARIZATION
2.7.1
VOLUME
2.7.1.1 VESSEL SHAPE
2.7.1.2 MAX. VOLUME
Page 180 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
2. SETUP (cont’d)
2.7.1.3 DIMENS. A
2.7.1.4 DIMENS. L
2.7.1
TABLE 1 – 8
2.7.2 TABLE 9 – 16
2.7.3 TABLE 17 – 24
2.7.4 TABLE 25 – 32
2.8 SIGNAL PROC.
2.8.1 NEAR RANGE
2.8.2 FAR RANGE
2.8.3 PROPAG. FACTOR
2.8.4 ECHO SELECT
2.8.4.1 ALGORITHM
2.8.4.2 POS. DETECT
2.8.4.3 ECHO THRESHOLD
2.8.4.4 CLEF RANGE
2.8.5 SAMPLING
2.8.5.1 ECHO LOCK
2.8.5.2 UP SAMP.
2.8.5.3 DOWN SAMP.
2.8.6 ECHO QUALITY
2.8.6.1 CONFIDENCE
2.8.6.2 ECHO STRENGTH
2.8.6.3 NOISE AVERAGE
2.8.7 TVT SETUP
2.8.7.1 AUTO ECHO SUPP
2.8.7.2 AUTO SUPP RANGE
2.8.7.3 HOVER LEVEL
2.8.7.4 SHAPER MODE
2.8.8 TVT SHAPER
2.8.8.1 BRKPT. 1-9
2.8.8.2 BRKPT. 10-18
2.8.8.3 BRKPT. 19-27
2.8.8.4 BRKPT. 28-36
2.8.8.5 BRKPT. 37-40
2.8.9 MEAS. VALUES
2.8.9.1 LEVEL MEAS.
2.8.9.2 SPACE MEAS.
2.8.9.3 DISTANCE MEAS.
2.8.9.4 VOLUME MEAS.
3. DIAGNOSTICS
3.1 ECHO PROFILE
3.2 ELECTRONICS TEMP.
3.2.1 CURR. INTERN. TEMP.
3.2.2 HIGHEST VALUE.
3.2.3 LOWEST VALUE.
4. SERVICE
4.1 MASTER RESET
4.2 REMAIN. DEV. LIFE
4.2.1 LIFETIME EXPECTE..
4.2.2 TIME IN OPER..
4.2.3 REMAIN. LIFETIM..
4.2.4 REMINDER ACTIV.
4.2.5 REMINDER 1 (REQ)
4.2.6 REMINDER 2 (DEM)
SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
4. SERVICE
(cont’d)
4.2.7 MAINT STAT
4.2.8 ACK STATUS
4.2.9 ACK
4.3 REMAIN. SENS. LIFE
4.3.1 LIFETIME EXPECTE..
4.3.2 TIME IN OPER..
4.3.3 REMAIN. LIFETIM..
4.3.4 REMINDER ACTIV.
4.3.5 REMINDER 1 (REQ)
4.3.6 REMINDER 2 (DEM)
4.3.7 MAINT STAT
4.3.8 ACK STATUS
4.3.9 ACK
4.4 SERVICE SCHED.
4.4.1 SERV. INTERVAL
4.4.2 TIME SINCE LAST
4.4.3 TIME UNTIL NEXT
4.4.4 REMINDER ACTIV.
4.4.5 REMINDER 1 (REQ)
4.4.6 REMINDER 2 (DEM)
4.4.7 MAINT STAT
4.4.8 ACK STATUS
4.4.9 ACK
4.5 CALIB.SCHED.
4.5.1 CALIB. INTERVAL
4.5.2 TIME SINCE LAST
4.5.3 TIME UNTIL NEXT
4.5.4 REMINDER ACTIV.
4.5.5 REMINDER 1 (REQ)
4.5.6 REMINDER 2 (DEM)
4.5.7 MAINT STAT
4.5.8 ACK STATUS
4.5.9 ACK
4.6 MANUF. DATE
4.7 POWERED HOURS
4.8 POWERON RESETS
4.9 LCD FAST MODE
4.10 LCD CONTRAST
4.11 MEM. TEST
5.
COMMUNICATION
5.1 DEVICE ADDRESS
6.
SECURITY
6.1 REMOTE ACCESS
6.1.1
ACCESS CONTROL
6.2 LOCAL ACCESS
6.2.1 WRITE PROTECT
6.2.2 PIN TO UNLOCK
7.
LANGUAGE
A5E32337676 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 181
Notes
Page 182 SITRANS LR200 (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337676
IQ300IX.fm Page 5 Tuesday, October 2, 2001 1:43 PM
www.siemens.com/processautomation
For more information
www.siemens.com/level www.siemens.com/continuous-weighing
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
1954 Technology Drive
P.O. Box 4225
Peterborough, ON
Canada K9J 7B1 email: [email protected]
www.siemens.com/processautomation
Subject to change without prior notice
A5E32337676 Rev. AA
© Siemens AG 2013
*A5E32337676*
Printed in Canada
-
Lutron Electronics DW-6093
SD card real time data recorder3 PHASEPOWER ANALYZERModel : DW-6093Your purchase ofthis 3 PHASE POWER ANALYZERmarks a stepforward for you intothe field ofprecisionmeasurement. Although thisPOWER ANALYZERis a complex anddelicate instrument,its durable structurewill allow manyyears of use ifproper operatingtechniques …
DW-6093 Measuring Instruments, 63
-
UWT Nivobob NB 4000
Continuous level measuring systemNB 4000Technical information / Instruction manualpage G Table of contents PageSafety notes / Technical support G2——————————————————————————————————Introduction G3————— …
Nivobob NB 4000 Measuring Instruments, 22
-
Siemens SITRANS F US SONOFLO
085R9413INSTRUCTIONSSITRANS F US SONOFLOUltrasonic flowmetertype SONO, submersible kit code no. 085L2403ContentsIndholdInhaltContenuEnglish1 tin Sylgard 517 A, 0.5 kg1 tin Sylgard 517 B, 0.5 kg1 mixing utensil1 set material safety data sheet1 plastic bottle1 funnelDansk1 dåse Sylgard 517 A, 0,5 kg1 dås …
SITRANS F US SONOFLO Measuring Instruments, 2
-
Lincoln C Series
Electronic lube meterModel 905, series “C”Installation and maintenance guideRead manual prior to installation or use of this product. Keep manual nearby for future reference. Failure to follow instructions and safety precautions may result in death or serious injury. DANGERDate of issue October 2014Form number 40 …
C Series Measuring Instruments, 24
-
DeWalt DW079
DW079Rotary LaserLaser rotatifLáser rotativoINSTRUCTION MANUALGUIDE D’UTILISATIONMANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONESINSTRUCTIVO DE OPERACIÓN, CENTROS DE SERVICIO Y PÓLIZA DE GARANTÍA. ADVERTENCIA: LÉASE ESTE INSTRUCTIVO ANTES DE USAR EL PRODUCTO. If you have questions or comments, contact us.Pour toute question ou tout c …
DW079 Measuring Instruments, 76
-
ASSEMBLAD OPA-189
ASSEMBLAD s.a.s. — Costruzioni Elettroniche 50013 — Campi Bisenzio — Firenze — Italy SAMPLING SMOKE METER Model OPA-189 USER MANUAL February 1997, Rev. V1.00 ASSEMBLAD — Engineering Department — Automotive Division File: c:\winword\189\M189gb10.doc …
OPA-189 Measuring Instruments, 33
-
CDI Meters CDI 5400
cdimeters CDI Meters, Inc. [email protected] 866-885-2462 www.cdimeters.com Using the Outputs The milliamp output is scaled so that four milliamps corresponds to zero flow and 20 milliamps corresponds to the range of the meter indicated on the data sheet. The meter will display the milliamp full-scale value fo …
CDI 5400 Measuring Instruments, 2
-
Hanna Instruments HI 99131
Instruction ManualHI 99131Portable WaterproofpH Meter for Plating BathsDear Customer,Thank you for choosing a Hanna Instrumentsproduct.Please read this instruction manual care-fully before using the instrument. If you needadditional technical information, do not hesi-tate to e-mail us at [email protected] instrume …
HI 99131 Multimeter, 2
-
Contents
-
Table of Contents
-
Troubleshooting
-
Bookmarks
Quick Links
Instruction Manual February 2008
sitrans
LR200 (PROFIBUS PA)
Related Manuals for Siemens sitrans LR200
Summary of Contents for Siemens sitrans LR200
-
Page 1
Instruction Manual February 2008 sitrans LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) -
Page 2
The user is responsible for all changes and repairs made to the device by the user or the user’s agent. • All new components are to be provided by Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments Inc. • Restrict repair to faulty components only. -
Page 3: Table Of Contents
Polarization reference point …………………14 Installation Instructions ……………………14 Wiring ……………………..16 Power ………………………….16 Connecting SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) …………….16 Basic PLC configuration with PROFIBUS PA …………….17 Operating via the handheld programmer …………..18 Activating SITRANS LR200 …………………….18 The LCD Display ………………………18 Handheld Programmer …………………..19…
-
Page 4
Device Description (DD) ……………………29 Configuring a new device ……………………29 Sensor calibration ……………………29 Quick Start Wizard via SIMATIC PDM …………………30 Linearization ……………………..33 Configuring a stillpipe application ……………….36 Changing parameter settings using SIMATIC PDM …………..37 Parameters accessed via pull-down menus …………….37 Auto False Echo Suppression ………………38 TVT Shaper …………………… -
Page 5
Remote Lockout……………………. 89 Security …………………………89 Write Locking ……………………..89 Language …………………………89 Appendix A: Alphabetical Parameter List …………..91 Appendix B: Troubleshooting ………………93 Communication Troubleshooting ………………….93 Device Status Icons ……………………..94 General Fault Codes ……………………..96 Operation Troubleshooting ………………….100 Appendix C: Maintenance ……………….. 103 Unit Repair and Excluded Liability ……………….. -
Page 6
Transducer block function groups………………123 Analog Input Function Blocks 1 and 2…………….125 Appendix G: Communications via PROFIBUS PA …………. 128 Device Configuration Tool …………………….128 SIMATIC PDM ……………………..128 Device Description (DD) ………………….128 Network Configuration ……………………128 The GSD file ……………………..128 Bus Termination ………………………129 Power Demands ……………………..129 PROFIBUS address ……………………..129 Operating as a Profile Device ………………….129… -
Page 7
Appendix J: Hazardous Area Installations …………..158 Wiring Details ……………………….158 Intrinsically Safe Model ………………….158 Device Nameplate ……………………..160 ATEX Certificate ………………………161 Instructions specific to hazardous area installations …………..163 Appendix K: Firmware Revision History …………..164 Glossary ……………………..165 Index ……………………..169 LCD menu structure ………………….. -
Page 8
Notes… -
Page 9: Safety Notes
FCC Conformity US Installations only: Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Siemens Milltronics could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Notes: • This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
-
Page 10: Ce Electromagnetic Compatibility (Emc) Conformity
SITRANS LR200. • This manual applies to the SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) only. This manual will help you set up your SITRANS LR200 for optimum performance. We always welcome suggestions and comments about manual content, design, and accessibility.
-
Page 11: Technical Support
Technical Support Support is available 24 hours a day. To find your local Siemens Automation Office address, phone number and fax number go www.siemens.com/automation/partner • Click on the tab Contacts by Product then drill down to find your product group (+Process Automation >…
-
Page 12
The output from the Level Transducer Block can be called the Primary Value (or Secondary Value). When it becomes the input to the AIFB, it is called the Process Variable. Page 4 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 13: Sitrans Lr200: Overview
Programming SITRANS LR200 is very easy to install and configure via a graphical user interface (LUI). You can modify the built-in parameters either locally via the Siemens infrared handheld programmer, or from a remote location using SIMATIC PDM.
-
Page 14: Specifications
Specifications Notes: • Siemens Milltronics makes every attempt to ensure the accuracy of these specifications but reserves the right to change them at any time. Power General Purpose: Nominal 24 V DC at Non-incendive: max. 550 Ohm: Intrinsically Safe: Bus powered…
-
Page 15: Interface
Reference conditions: Response Rate (1.2.) set to FAST, LCD Fast Mode (4.2.) set to ON. Display quality will be degraded in temperatures below –25 °C (–13 °F) and above +65 °C (+149 °F). 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 7…
-
Page 16: Environmental
The maximum temperature is dependent on the process connection, antenna materials, Maximum Process and vessel pressure. For more detail, or for other configurations, see Temperature Chart Process Pressure/Temperature derating curves on page 110, and page 111 onwards. Page 8 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 17: Approvals
• Marine Lloyd’s Register of Shipping ABS Type Approval Programmer (infrared keypad) Siemens Milltronics Infrared IS (Intrinsically Safe) handheld programmer for hazardous and all other locations (battery is non-replaceable with a life expectancy of 10 years in normal use). • approval…
-
Page 18: Dimensions: Uni-Construction Polypropylene Rod Antenna
The shield is the area of the rod which is inactive. The shield length must be longer than the vessel nozzle height. Page 10 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 19: Installation
• Installation shall only be performed by qualified personnel and in accordance with local governing regulations. • SITRANS LR200 is to be used only in the manner outlined in this manual, otherwise protection provided by the device may be impaired.
-
Page 20: Mounting Location
(The concavity of the top can focus echoes into the centre, giving false readings.) Under certain circumstances, it may be acceptable to mount SITRANS LR200 at Note: the centre of a flat-topped tank: please discuss this with your Siemens Milltronics Representative.
-
Page 21
Temperature Chart on page 110. Maximum Process Temperature Chart For other configurations, see on page 110, and the Process Pressure/Temperature derating curves process pressure derating curves beginning on on page 111. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 13… -
Page 22: Polarization Reference Point
• Do not rotate the enclosure after programming and device configuration, otherwise an error may occur, caused by a polarity shift of the transmit pulse. Before inserting SITRANS LR200 into its mounting connection, check to ensure the threads are matching, to avoid damaging them.
-
Page 23
Notes 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 15… -
Page 24: Wiring
PA cable, and thread the wires through the cable gland. May be shipped with the device. If cable is routed through conduit, use only approved suitable-size hubs for your application. Page 16 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 25: Basic Plc Configuration With Profibus Pa
Basic PLC configuration with PROFIBUS PA active PC/laptop PROFIBUS DP DP/PA coupler PROFIBUS PA SITRANS SITRANS SITRANS LR200 LR200 LR200 (PROFIBUS (PROFIBUS (PROFIBUS The instrument shield connection is internally connected to the external ground lug. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 17…
-
Page 26: Operating Via The Handheld Programmer
Operating via the handheld programmer SITRANS LR200 carries out its level measurement tasks according to settings made via parameters. The settings can be modified locally via the Local User Interface (LUI) which consists of an LCD display and a handheld programmer.
-
Page 27: Handheld Programmer
2.2.1.2 number LIQUID parameter name parameter PREVIOUS value/ BACK EDIT selection NEXT Edit view MATERIAL 2.2.1.2 LIQUID LIQUID LOW DK Handheld Programmer (Part No. 7ML1930-1BK) The programmer is ordered separately. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 19…
-
Page 28: Programming Sitrans Lr200
• Do not use the handheld programmer at the same time as SIMATIC PDM or erratic operation may result. • SITRANS LR200 automatically returns to Measurement mode after a period of inactivity in PROGRAM mode (between 15 seconds and 10 minutes, depending on the menu level).
-
Page 29: Programming Via The Handheld Programmer
Max. 300 mm (1 ft) • Mode opens the menu level last displayed in PROGRAM mode within the last 10 minutes, or menu level 1 if power has been cycled since then. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 21…
-
Page 30
The current selection is highlighted. Scroll to a new selection. MATERIAL 2.2.1.2 Press RIGHT Arrow to accept it LIQUID The LCD returns to parameter view and displays LIQUID LOW DK the new selection. Page 22 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 31
Erases the display. editing Decimal Numeric Enters a decimal point. point editing Plus/ Numeric minus Changes the sign of the entered value. editing sign Numeric Numeral Enters the corresponding character. editing 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 23… -
Page 32: Quick Start Wizard Via The Handheld Programmer
Use a setting just faster than the maximum filling or emptying rate (whichever is greater). 1.3. Sensor Units Select the units for the Quick Start variables (high and low calibration point, and level, distance, or space). M, CM, MM, FT, IN Options Page 24 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 33
YES, NO, DONE ( Options fully completed.) Press Mode to return to Measurement mode. SITRANS LR200 is now ready to operate. Dimen- The point from which High and Low Calibration points are referenced: see sions: Uni-construction Polypropylene Rod Antenna on page 10 for the standard ver-… -
Page 34: Requesting An Echo Profile
Measurement mode. Auto False Echo Suppression If SITRANS LR200 displays a false high level, or the reading is fluctuating between the correct level and a false high level, you can use Auto False Echo Suppression to prevent false echo detection.
-
Page 35: Level Application Example
Material level referenced from Low Cali- Operation (1.4.) LEVEL bration Point. Low Calibration Point (1.5.) 15.5 Process empty level. High Calibration Point (1.6.) Process full level. Apply? (Apply changes) (1.7.) Save new settings. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 27…
-
Page 36: Operating Via Simatic Pdm
Note: For a complete list of parameters, see on page 44. SIMATIC PDM is a software package used to commission and maintain SITRANS LR200 and other process devices. Please consult the operating instructions or online help for details on using SIMATIC PDM. (You can find more information at www.fielddevices.com: go to Products and Solutions >…
-
Page 37: Device Description (Dd)
Device Description (DD) You can locate the DD in Device Catalog, under Sensors/Level/Echo/Siemens Milltronics/ SITRANS LR200. Check the product page of our website at: https://pia.khe.siemens.com/index.asp?Nr=7427, under Downloads, to make sure you have the latest version of SIMATIC PDM, the most recent Service Pack (SP) and the most Configuring a new device recent hot fix (HF).
-
Page 38: Quick Start Wizard Via Simatic Pdm
The graphic Quick Start Wizard provides an easy 5-step guide to help you configure your device for a simple application. Please consult the operating instructions or online help for details on using SIMATIC PDM. (Application Guides for setting up Siemens PROFIBUS PA instruments with SIMATIC PDM are available on our website: www.siemens.com/processautomation.)
-
Page 39
Click NEXT to accept the default values. (Description, Message, and Installation Date fields can be left blank.) Step 2 – Application Type Select the application type and the material, then click on NEXT. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 31… -
Page 40
To describe a more complex Using Linearization via shape see the Quick Start wizard on page Select the vessel shape, and click NEXT. Step 4 – Range Set the parameters, and click NEXT. Page 32 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 41: Linearization
Example (values are for example purposes only.) 0.5 m Breakpoint Level Level Volume number value Break- value value point no. 19.5 20 m 3000 19.5 8000 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 33…
-
Page 42
In Step 3 – Vessel Shape, choose the vessel shape option Linearization Table and click on Next. In Step 4 – Range Setup, enter parameter values then click on Linearization. linearization Page 34 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 43
Enter the desired level and volume values, and press OK. Note: Reset resets values to the values in the offline table. c) In the Step 4 window, click on NEXT. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 35… -
Page 44: Configuring A Stillpipe Application
Low dK; and set the stillpipe diameter as desired. The propagation factor is automatically updated according to the pipe diameter. • Continue through steps 3 to 5 then click on Transfer to download settings to the device. Page 36 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 45: Changing Parameter Settings Using Simatic Pdm
Cancel during an upload from device to SIMATIC PDM will result in some parameters being updated. Launch SIMATIC PDM, connect to SITRANS LR200, and upload data from the device. Adjust parameter values in the parameter value field then press Enter. The status fields read Changed.
-
Page 46: Auto False Echo Suppression
• Before adjusting these parameters, rotate the instrument for best signal (lower false-echo amplitude). SITRANS LR200 first learns the echo profile. Then the learned profile, or part of it, is used Auto False Echo Suppression to screen out false echoes. (See on page 106 for a more detailed explanation.)
-
Page 47: Tvt Shaper
Offset+ and Offset–. • Alternatively, enter values for Point and Offset directly into the dialog boxes. • If desired, click on the TVT breakpoint settings, then press Transfer to Device. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 39…
-
Page 48: Display
• Open the menu View – Echo Profile. • To view a saved profile open the menu View – Show Echo Profile. Page 40 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 49: Simulation
Has the same effect as recycling power to the device • Resets the PROFIBUS device address to 126 Reset Address to 126 • If the address lock was on, will disable the lock. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 41…
-
Page 50: Write Locking
Note: Double click each axis and record the Xscale and Data Scale values, so that you can restore the default view by resetting to these values. Open the menu View – Trend. trend line Page 42 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 51: Maintenance
Open the menu View – Acknowledge Faults, select the appropriate item from the Extended Diagnostics pull-down menu, and click on Transfer. Set Address Open the menu Device – Set Address. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 43…
-
Page 52: Parameter Reference
Quick Start Wear Auto False Echo Suppression Peak Values TVT Shaper Toolbar Simulation Status bar Maintenance Device Reset Update Write Locking Visible only after an echo profile has been saved. Page 44 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 53: Quick Start Wizard
Text that can be used in any way. Limited to 32 ASCII characters. No specific recommended use. 2.1.4. Firmware Revision Corresponds to the software or firmware that is embedded in the Field Device. Read only. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 45…
-
Page 54: Input
150 mm 200 mm (2”) (3”) (4”) (6”) (8”) Size (I.D.) Propagation 0.8298 0.9372 0.9603 0.9825 0.9902 Factor Since pipe dimensions may vary slightly, the propagation factor may also vary. Page 46 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 55
Dimensions: Uni-con- The point from which distance measurement is referenced (see struction Polypropylene Rod Antenna Appendix H: Flange Adapter on page 10 and Versions on page 142 for other configurations). 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 47… -
Page 56
Check the material level reported by the device against the actual material level. If necessary adjust Sensor Offset to compensate, until the reading is correct. See Low Calibration Pt. (2.2. 1 .4.) on page 47 for an illustration. Page 48 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 57
Sphere Transducer block PV (Primary Value): the output from the Level Transducer Block. See function groups How the LTB works on page 123 and on page 123 for more details. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 49… -
Page 58
Flat sloped bottom dimension A PARABOLIC ENDS/ maximum volume, Parabolic end dimension A, horizontal cylinder dimension L LINEAR TABLE/ maximum volume, Linearization table level breakpoints, (level/volume volume breakpoints breakpoints) Page 50 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 59
Length of the cylindrical section of a horizontal parabolic end vessel, in Level Units. See Vessel Shape (2.2.2.2.) for an illustration. Range: –999999 to 999999 in Level Units Values Default: 0.0 Vessel Shape (2.2.2.2.) Related Parameters 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 51… -
Page 60
Go to Y value (2.2.2.6.3.) and enter the volume value for the breakpoint just identified. Repeat steps (a) to (c) till values have been entered for all required breakpoints. Page 52 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 61
Values Default: 5 Related LOE Timer (2.4.1.) Parameters Use this feature when an incorrect material level is reported. Echo confidence indicates echo reliability: higher values represent better echo qual- ity. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 53… -
Page 62
2.2.3.2.1. Echo Lock Ensure the agitator is always running while SITRANS LR200 Note: is monitoring the vessel, to avoid stationary blade detection. Selects the measurement verification process. See Echo Lock on page 106 for more details. -
Page 63
2.2.3.3. Filtering 2.2.3.3.1. Shots The number of echo profile samples averaged to produce a measurement. Range: 1 to 25 Values Default: 25 Echo Lock on page 106 for more detail. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 55… -
Page 64
Calibration Point. Dimensions: Uni-construction For the standard configuration reference point see Polypropylene Rod Antenna Appendix H: on page 10. For other configurations see Flange Adapter Versions on page 142 onwards. Page 56 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 65
Displays the absolute strength (in dB above 1 µV rms) of the echo selected as the measurement echo. –20 to 99 Values (view only) Open the menu View – Echo Profile. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 57… -
Page 66
2.2.4. TVT (Auto False Echo Suppression) setup First SITRANS LR200 learns the echo profile. Then the learned profile, or part of the learned profile, is used to screen out false echoes. Before Auto False Echo Suppression and After Auto False Echo Suppression on page 59 for examples. -
Page 67
Press RIGHT Arrow to open Edit mode. Enter the new value and press RIGHT Arrow to accept it. Set Auto False Echo Suppression (2.2.4.2.) 2.2.4.4. Shaper Mode Enables/disables TVT shaper (2.2.5.). Options 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 59… -
Page 68
To access TVT shaper via SIMATIC PDM: • Open the menu Device – TVT shaper. Auto False Echo Suppression • For more details and an illustration see on page 38. Page 60 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 69
(2.2.6.1.) is altered. Defines the maximum rate at which the reported sensor value is allowed to increase. Allows you to further adjust the SITRANS LR200 response to increases in the rate at which the vessel fills. Range: 0 to 20 m / min. -
Page 70: Output
Note: (2.2.6.1.) is altered Defines the maximum rate at which the reported sensor value is allowed to decrease. Adjusts the SITRANS LR200 response to decreases in the rate at which the vessel empties. Range: 0 to 20 m / min.
-
Page 71
Automatic Mode (AUTO) Manual Mode (MAN) Options Out of Service (O/S) Allows you to put the SITRANS LR200 into Out of Service Mode and then reset it to Automatic Mode. Simulation Manual Mode is used in conjunction with Simulation. See page 41. -
Page 72
Range: 0 to 65535 Values Default: 0 2.3.1.6.4. Batch Phase Identifies the active Control Recipe Phase. Range: 0 to 65535 Values Default: 0 2.3.1.7. Process Value Scale Out (AIFB1) Output Scale Page 64 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 73
Range: -999999 to 999999 Values Default: 100 % 2.3.1.9. Output Limits 2.3.1.9.1. Lower Limit Alarm The setting for the lower alarm limit in AIFB1 units. Range: -999999 to 999999 Values Default: -999999 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 65… -
Page 74
SIMATIC PDM up to seven decimal places may be used to display measured values.) Range: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 Options Default: 2 2.3.2. AIFB2 (See AIFB1: the parameters for AIFB2 are identical.) Page 66 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 75: Fail-Safe
Material level to be reported SUB VALUE Default value used as output value. * LAST VALUE Store last valid output value. Options USE BAD VALUE Calculated output value is incorrect. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 67…
-
Page 76: Diagnostics
We recommend that you use SIMATIC PCS7 Asset Management Software in conjunction with SIMATIC PDM. Open the menu View – Device Status and click on the appropriate tab to monitor maintenance and diagnostics conditions. Page 68 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 77: Fault Reset
Open the menu View – Echo Profile. If desired, press Save. To view the saved profile, open the menu View – Show Echo Profile. To request a profile via the handheld programmer: See page 70. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 69…
-
Page 78: Measured Values
3.3.6. Max. Output Value — AIFB2 The maximum recorded Output Value from Analog Input Function Block 2. 3.3.7. Min. Internal Temperature The minimum recorded electronics temperature of SITRANS LR200. 3.3.8. Max. Internal Temperature The maximum recorded electronics temperature of SITRANS LR200.
-
Page 79: Remaining Device Lifetime
After modifying values/units as required, click on Write to accept the change, and Read to view the effect of the change. • Click on Snooze to add a year to the Total Expected Device Life. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 71…
-
Page 80
To enable or disable Maintenance Alert Activation via SIMATIC PDM: a) First set the limit values in Maintenance Required Limit (3.4.3.)/ Maintenance Demanded Limit (3.4.4.). b) Select the desired Alert Activation option. Page 72 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 81
In the Device Lifetime section click on Acknowledge Warnings. To acknowledge an alert via the handheld programmer: a) Press RIGHT arrow twice to open parameter view and activate Edit Mode. b) Press RIGHT arrow to acknowledge the alert. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 73… -
Page 82: Remaining Sensor Lifetime
Read to view the effect of the change. • Click on Snooze to add a year to the Total Expected Sensor Life. • Click on Sensor Replaced to restart the timer and clear any fault messages. Page 74 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 83
If Remaining Sensor Lifetime (3.5.2.) is equal to or less than this limit, the device sets Maintenance Demanded. Range: 0 to 20 years Values Default: 0.019 years a) Modify limit values as required b) Set Maintenance Alert Activation (3.5.5.) to the desired option. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 75… -
Page 84
3.5.8. Acknowledge Status Acknowledges the status of the Maintenance limits. In SIMATIC PDM, open the menu View – Device Status, click on the Maintenance tab, and check the Sensor Lifetime Status window. Page 76 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 85: Condensed Status Setup
Select Yes or No to enable/disable Condensed Mode. 3.6.2. Features supported (View only) Features supported are: • Condensed Diagnostics • Extended Diagnostics • Application Relationships 3.6.3. Features enabled (View only) Lists those features that have been enabled. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 77…
-
Page 86: Condensed Status
Go to Condensed Status Mode (3.6. 1 .) and select Yes to enable Condensed Mode. b) Go to Event Index (3.7. 1 .) and enter the event index number corresponding to the event. Page 78 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 87
Go to Level Meter > Diagnostics > Condensed Status. c) Select the Status line for the selected Event, then choose a Status option from the associated pull-down menu. Condensed Status on page 133 for more detail. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 79… -
Page 88: Service
• device addresses are not reset Factory Defaults • Lock and Unlock values are not reset • the learned TVT curve is not lost Condensed Mode Diagnosis on page 136 for more detail. Page 80 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 89: Lcd Fast Mode
Range: 0 (High contrast) to 20 (Low contrast). Default: 8 Values Adjust the value to improve visibility in different temperatures and luminosity. Change the value in small steps to ensure you can continue to read the display. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 81…
-
Page 90: Profibus Ident Number
This information can be integrated into any Asset Management system. For optimal use, we recommend that you use SIMATIC PCS7 Asset Management Software in conjunction with SIMATIC PDM. Page 82 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 91
• Via the handheld programmer, manually reset Time Last Serviced (4.17.1.) to zero. 4.17.2. Remaining Lifetime Read only. Total Service Interval (4.17.6.) less Time Last Serviced (4.17.1.). 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 83… -
Page 92
ON — limits 1 and 2 ON — limit 2 a) First set the limit values in Maintenance Required Limit (4.17.3.)/ Maintenance Demanded Limit (4.17.4.). b) Select the desired Maintenance Alert Activation option. Page 84 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 93
In the Service Schedule Status section click on Acknowledge Warnings. To acknowledge an alert via the handheld programmer: a) Press RIGHT arrow twice to open parameter view and activate Edit Mode. b) Press RIGHT arrow to acknowledge the alert. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 85… -
Page 94: Calibration Interval
Click on Calibration Performed to restart the timer and clear any fault messages. 4.18.1. Time Last Calibrated Time elapsed since last calibration. Can be reset to zero after performing a service. Page 86 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 95
ON — limits 1 and 2 ON — limit 2 a) First set the limit values in Maintenance Required Limit (4.18.3.)/ Maintenance Demanded Limit (4.18.4.). b) Select the desired Maintenance Alert Activation option. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 87… -
Page 96
Warnings. To acknowledge an alert via the handheld programmer: a) Press RIGHT arrow twice to open parameter view and activate Edit Mode. b) Press RIGHT arrow to acknowledge the alert. Page 88 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 97: Communication
In SIMATIC PDM, open the menu Device – Write Locking, and select On or Off. 7. Language Selects the language to be used on the LCD. English German Options French Spanish 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 89…
-
Page 98
Notes Page 90 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 99: Appendix A: Alphabetical Parameter List
Filter Time Constant (2.3.1.4.) Firmware Revision (2.1.4.) Hardware Revision (2. 1 .6.) High Calibration Point (1.6.) Language (7.) LCD Contrast (4.3.) LCD Fast Mode (4.2.) Level Offset (2.2. 1 .9.) Loader Revision (2.1.5.) 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 91…
-
Page 100
Tank Bottom Algorithm (2.2.3.4.) Temperature Units (2.2. 1 . 1 1.) TVT Hover Level (2.2.4.1.) TVT shaper (2.2.5.) Unit (Level) (2.2.1.6.) Vessel Shape (2.2.2.2.) Volume breakpoints (2.2.2.6.) Window (2.2.3.2.4.) Write Locking (6.1.) Page 92 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 101: Appendix B: Troubleshooting
Make sure Write Locking (6.1.) on page 89 is disabled. grammer. Check the following parameters: • Remote Lockout (5.2.) on page 89 should be You try to set a SITRANS LR200 disabled. parameter via remote communi- • Write Locking (6.1.) on page 89 should be disabled.
-
Page 102: Device Status Icons
• Check the network to ensure the PCL is communicating with the LR200. If you continue to experience problems, go to our website at: www.siemens.com/processautomation, and check the FAQs for SITRANS LR200, or contact your Siemens Milltronics representative. Device Status Icons…
-
Page 103
• Out of operation • Communication is good; device is out of action. • Data exchanged • No data exchange • Write access enabled • Write access disabled 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 95… -
Page 104: General Fault Codes
Mainte- nance Demanded Limit. S: 6 Sensor is nearing its lifetime limit Replacement is recommended. according to the value set in Mainte- nance Required Limit. Page 96 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA)– INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 105
• Inspect for heat-related damage and contact your local Siemens representative if repair is required. • Fault code will persist until a manual reset is performed using PDM or the LCD interface. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 97… -
Page 106
Ensure value of the Ident number selec- S: 32 tor is correct for the network configura- IDENT number conflict. tion. If it is correct, the device needs to be re- parameterized by the PLC. Page 98 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA)– INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 107
S: 43 Factory calibration for the radar Repair required: contact your local receiver has been lost. Siemens representative. S: 51 EEPROM corrupt. Repair required: contact your local Siemens representative. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 99… -
Page 108: Operation Troubleshooting
• setting for Sensor Offset • check Sensor Offset (2.2.1.10.) (2.2.1.10.) not correct • check nameplate rating against Screen blank power error voltage supply • check power wiring or source Page 100 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA)– INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 109
• vessel near empty and • check the setting for CLEF low dK material (Constrained Leading Edge Fit) Range (2.2.3.4.1.): see the table below Propagation Factor (2.2.1.1.) for recommended settings 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 101… -
Page 110
Notes Page 102 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA)– INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 111: Appendix C: Maintenance
Appendix C: Maintenance SITRANS LR200 requires no maintenance or cleaning under normal operating conditions. Under severe operating conditions, the antenna may require periodic cleaning. If cleaning becomes necessary: • Note the antenna material and the process medium, and select a cleaning solution that will not react adversely with either.
-
Page 112: Appendix D: Technical Reference
Electromagnetic waves are not attenuated by dust. SITRANS LR200 consists of an enclosed electronic circuit coupled to an antenna and process connection. The electronic component generates a radar signal (6.3 GHz in North America, 5.8 GHz elsewhere) that is directed to the antenna.
-
Page 113: Time Varying Threshold (Tvt) Curves
The true echo is selected based on the setting for the Echo selection algorithm: Algorithm (2.2.3.1.1.). Options are true First Echo, Largest Echo, or best of Largest or First. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 105…
-
Page 114: Echo Lock
In radar applications, two measurement verification options are used: • Lock Off: SITRANS LR200 responds immediately to a new selected echo (within the restrictions set by the Maximum Fill / Empty Rate), but measurement reliability is affected. •…
-
Page 115: Measurement Range
Measurement Range Near Range Near Range (2.2.3.5.1.) programs SITRANS LR200 to ignore the zone in front of the antenna. The default blanking distance is 50 mm (1.97″) from end of horn antenna. Near Range allows you to increase the blanking value from its factory default. But Auto False Echo Suppression (2.2.4.2.) is generally recommended in preference to extending…
-
Page 116: Damping
, and the text region displays the fault code S: 0 for Loss of Echo. Upon receiving a reliable echo, the loss of echo condition is aborted, the Service Required icon and error message are cleared, and the reading returns to the current level. Page 108 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA)– INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 117: Loe (Loss Of Echo) Timer
The two Analog Input Function blocks are set separately. For example, to set a user- defined value for AIFB1: • Set Fail-safe Mode FB1 (2.4.2.) to Use substitute value. • Go to Fail-safe Value FB1 (2.4.3.) and enter the desired value. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 109…
-
Page 118: Maximum Process Temperature Chart
Where the chart does not apply, please use your own judgement regarding the use of SITRANS LR200. Open the menu View – Peak Values, and click on the temperature tab to see the maximum and minimum temperatures recorded. If the internal temperature exceeds the maximum allowable limit, a sun shield or a longer nozzle may be required.
-
Page 119: Process Pressure/Temperature Derating Curves
. In the event the instrument package is replaced, the Process Device Tag shall be transferred to the replacement unit. • SITRANS LR200 units are hydrostatically tested, meeting or exceeding the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and the European Pressure Equipment Directive.
-
Page 120: Ptfe Rod Antenna Ansi Hole Pattern Flanges
3 hours at temperatures up to 120°C (248°F) at 1 bar pressure. Customer to provide adequate bolting to retain vessel pressure and provide sufficient sealing. Page 112 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA)– INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 121: Ptfe Rod Antenna Threaded Connections
UHMW-PE antennas are rated to a maximum of 80°C (176°F) of continuous duty; however, they can be used for periods of up to 3 hours at temperatures up to 120°C (248°F) at 1 bar pressure. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 113…
-
Page 122: Horn Antenna Or Wave Guide — Ansi Hole Pattern Flanges
WARNING: Never attempt to loosen, remove, or disassemble process connection or instrument housing while vessel contents are under pressure. Customer to provide adequate bolting and flat-faced gasket to retain vessel pressure and pro- vide sufficient sealing. Page 114 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA)– INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 123: Appendix E: Application Examples
Response Rate (1.2.) 1 m/minute Units (1.3.) meters Quick start wizard Operation (1.4.) LEVEL Level parameters Low Calibration Point (1.5.) High Calibration Point (1.6.) 0.5 m Apply? (Apply changes) (1.7.) 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 115…
-
Page 124
For more details see Auto Suppression Range (2.2.4.3.) on page 59 and Auto False Echo Suppression (2.2.4.2.) on page 58. Return to Measurement mode: press Mode to start normal operation. Page 116 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 125: Horizontal Vessel With Volume Measurement
Quick start when a vessel shape is wizard Operation (1.4.) LEVEL selected in Vessel Shape parameters (2.2.2.2.) Low Calibration Point (1.5.) High Calibration Point (1.6.) 0.5 m Apply? (Apply changes) (1.7.) 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 117…
-
Page 126
For more details see Auto Suppression Range (2.2.4.3.) on page 59 and Auto False Echo Suppression (2.2.4.2.) on page 58. Return to Measurement mode: press Mode to start normal operation. Page 118 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 127: Sliding Waveguide On Anaerobic Digesters
LR200 will report value set Other in Fail-safe Mode. parame- ters Fail-safe Mode FB1 (2.4.2.) Use substitute value Fail-safe Value FB1 (2.4.3.) Level will be reported as 9 m. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 119…
-
Page 128: Stillpipe Application
In the event of a loss of echo, after 2 minutes LR200 is to report a user-defined value of 4.75 m (Fail-safe High condition). vent hole sensor reference point 0.5 m High Cal. 100 mm (4”) diameter Low Cal. Point Page 120 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 129
For more details see Auto Suppression Range (2.2.4.3.) on page 59 and Auto False Echo Suppression (2.2.4.2.) on page 58. Return to Measurement mode: press Mode to start normal operation. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 121… -
Page 130: Appendix F: Profibus Pa Profile Structure
Level TB, and apply any required quality checks, scaling, and Failsafe operation selections. The output of an Analog Input Function Block supplies the measured value and associated status information to PROFIBUS PA, via cyclic data transfer. Page 122 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 131: Description Of The Blocks
The sensor value is stored in Sensor Value. The analog signal from the sensor is transformed into a digital signal. A Sensor Offset (default 0) provides compensation if necessary for changes in the sensor. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 123…
-
Page 132
Primary Value (PV) / Level or Volume • Secondary Value 1 (SV1) / Level • Secondary Value 2 (SV2) / Distance (sensor units) Level Offset (default O) can compensate for specific tank configurations. Page 124 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 133: Analog Input Function Blocks 1 And 2
The output from the Level Transducer Block can be called the Primary Value (or Secondary Value). When it becomes the input to the AIFB, it is called the Process Variable. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 125…
-
Page 134
Variable scale are the same as the units used for the LTB output.) Output units together with Process Variable range determine how the LTB output is converted to whatever units the customer wants. Page 126 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 135
A hysteresis parameter prevents toggling in the Status field of the OUT value.) The OUT VALUE parameter is the value for the cyclic data transfer. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 127… -
Page 136: Appendix G: Communications Via Profibus Pa
Appendix G: Communications via PROFIBUS PA SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) is a Profile Version 3.01, Class B, PA device. It supports Class 1 Master for cyclic and acyclic data exchange, and Class 2 for acyclic services. The full range of SITRANS LR200 functions is available only over a PROFIBUS PA network.
-
Page 137: Bus Termination
2.092), available from www.profibus.com. Power Demands To determine how many devices can be connected to a bus line, calculate the combined maximum current consumption of all the connected devices: 10.5 mA for SITRANS LR200. Allow a current reserve for safety. PROFIBUS address A unique PROFIBUS address identifies each device on the network.
-
Page 138: Configuring A Device
29. Configuring PROFIBUS PA with an S7-300/ 400 PLC If SITRANS LR200 is not listed in the STEP 7 device catalog, you can download the DeviceInstall file from the Siemens Milltronics Web site and run it from your computer.
-
Page 139: Cyclic Data
Cyclic Data When you configure SITRANS LR200 on the PROFIBUS PA bus, there are two slots available for modules. Each of the slots has to have a module defined in it. Note: Slot 0 always transmits AIFB1 information ; slot 1 defaults to Free Place, but can be changed to AIFB2 information.
-
Page 140
This could happen when a firmware download has been done, but a system reset has not been done. This could also happen if the function blocks are not configured prop- erly using the handheld programmer, PDM or acyclic services. Page 132 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 141: Condensed Status
Usability of the process value depends on the applica- tion. 0x68 UNCERTAIN – main- Value is potentially invalid. Maintenance is demanded …0x6B tenance demanded within a short-term period. (See Diagnostics (3.) on page 68.) 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 133…
-
Page 142
BAD – passivated (diagnostics Configured failsafe value is used, 0x23 alerts disabled) accompanied by this status. 0x24 BAD – maintenance alarm, more No measurement available because of a …0x27 diagnosis available failure. Page 134 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 143: Diagnostics
You can choose which of these will be returned, by enabling or disabling Condensed Status Mode (3.6.1.) on page 77. The default setting is Condensed Status disabled: Extended Mode Diagnosis Extended Mode Diagnosis will be returned (see on page 136 for the codes). 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 135…
-
Page 144: Condensed Mode Diagnosis
Condensed Mode Diagnosis Condensed Mode Diagnosis Indication Hex values Byte Description class 0x01000000 Electronics failure 0x02000000 Mechanical failure 0x04000000 Motor Temperature too high 0x08000000 Electronics temperature too high 0x10000000 Memory error Page 136 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 145
1: More diagnosis information is available in DIAGNOSIS_EXTENSION R indicates the message remains active as long as the reason for the message exists. A indicates the message will automatically reset after 10 seconds 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 137… -
Page 146: Acyclic Extended Diagnostics (General Fault Codes)
Replacement is recommended. limit according to the value set in Maintenance Demanded Limit. Sensor is nearing its lifetime Replacement is recommended. limit according to the value set in Maintenance Required Limit. Page 138 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 147
Check configuration for AIFB2. Upper and lower input values Ensure that Upper Value and (Process Value Scale) for AIFB2 S:15 Lower Value (Process Value are the same. Scale) are not the same. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 139… -
Page 148
Cycle power. If fault persists, Unable to start microwave contact your local Siemens S:36 module. representative. Cycle power. If fault persists, Measurement hardware contact your local Siemens S:37 problem. representative. Page 140 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 149: Acyclic Data
Siemens representative. Acyclic Data SITRANS LR200 supports up to four simultaneous connections by a Class 2 Master (C2 connection). It supports one connection by a Class 1 Master (C1 connection). In order for a Class 1 Master to read parameters from an instrument, it needs to know the slot and absolute index of the parameter.
-
Page 150: Appendix H: Flange Adapter Versions
• The reference drawing listed on the tag is available on the product page of our website at: https://pia.khe.siemens.com/index.asp?Nr=7427. Under More Info click on Installation Drawings, then scroll down to Level Measurement > Installation Drawings > SITRANS LR200.
-
Page 151: Dimensions: Threaded Connection, Ptfe Rod
• The reference drawing listed on the tag is available on the product page of our website at: https://pia.khe.siemens.com/index.asp?Nr=7427. Under More Info click on Installation Drawings, then scroll down to Level Measurement > Installation Drawings > SITRANS LR200.
-
Page 152: Dimensions: Threaded Connection, Ptfe Rod, Shielded
• The reference drawing listed on the tag is available on the product page of our website at: https://pia.khe.siemens.com/index.asp?Nr=7427. Under More Info click on Installation Drawings, then scroll down to Level Measurement > Installation Drawings > SITRANS LR200.
-
Page 153: Dimensions: Ff Flange With Horn Antenna And Waveguide Extension
• The reference drawing listed on the tag is available on the product page of our website at: https://pia.khe.siemens.com/index.asp?Nr=7427. Under More Info click on Installation Drawings, then scroll down to Level Measurement > Installation Drawings > SITRANS LR200.
-
Page 154: Horn Dimensions
17 degrees Height from bottom of horn to sensor reference point Polarization reference point – 3dB in the direction of the polarization axis (see on page 14 for an illustration). Page 146 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 155: Dimensions: Ff Flange With Waveguide
• The reference drawing listed on the tag is available on the product page of our website at: https://pia.khe.siemens.com/index.asp?Nr=7427. Under More Info click on Installation Drawings, then scroll down to Level Measurement > Installation Drawings > SITRANS LR200.
-
Page 156: Dimensions: Sliding Waveguide Configuration
• The reference drawing listed on the tag is available on the product page of our website at: https://pia.khe.siemens.com/index.asp?Nr=7427. Under More Info click on Installation Drawings, then scroll down to Level Measurement > Installation Drawings > SITRANS LR200.
-
Page 157: Dimensions: Sanitary Connection, Rod Antenna, Ptfe Or Hdpe
• The reference drawing listed on the tag is available on the product page of our website at: https://pia.khe.siemens.com/index.asp?Nr=7427. Under More Info click on Installation Drawings, then scroll down to Level Measurement > Installation Drawings > SITRANS LR200.
-
Page 158: Dimensions: Flanges
Dimensions: Flanges bolt hole Ø enclosure mounting holes (threaded) flange O.D. 20 mm (0.8”), nominal horn/waveguide mounting holes (threaded) bolt hole circle Ø process side “A” “A” Page 150 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 159
330 mm 290 mm 23 mm Due to the limited space on this flange, SITRANS LR200 can only use 4 of the standard 8 bolt holes of the 2” ANSI #300 size. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL… -
Page 160: Flange Marking
Serial Number Thread Size Thread Series MMDDYYXXX G/PF Serial number:a unique number allotted to each flange, including the date of manufacture (MMDDYY) followed by a number from 001 to 999. Page 152 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 161: Flange Mounting Instructions
2″ / DIN 50 customer-supplied flange integral process seal nozzle/vessel juncture straight/taper transition Rod Extension Requirements * Refer to the table on page 154. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 153…
-
Page 162: Rod Assembly
>150 mm (6”) n/r: extension not required * Consult Siemens Milltronics for assistance with nozzle sizes not listed. ** Application not recommended for 50 mm (2”) I.D. nozzles longer than 100 mm (4”). Shielded rod antennas are available for these applications.
-
Page 163: Mounting Guidelines
For smaller diameters use a shielded rod Sanitary Connection with Rod Antenna sanitary fitting ferrule 2” , 3” , and 4” sanitary fitting ferrule with integral gasket, with rod antenna 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 155…
-
Page 164: Waveguide Antenna
• The horn must be connected to the SITRANS LR200 process flange. If horn diameter is too large for the nozzle opening, insert it from inside the vessel. Page 156 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 165: Mounting On A Stillpipe Or Bypass Pipe
80 mm (3”) Bad joints create reflections. To equalize pressure and keep the liquid level in the bypass constant with the liquid level in the vessel. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 157…
-
Page 166: Appendix J: Hazardous Area Installations
FM/CSA Non-incendive Class 1, Div 2 connection drawing number 23650537 FM/CSA Intrinsically Safe connection drawing number 23650529 Intrinsically Safe Model Under the entity evaluation concept, SITRANS LR200 has the following characteristics: (input voltage) U = 24 V (input current) I…
-
Page 167
Separately powered equipment needs a galvanic isolation to assure that the intrinsically safe fieldbus circuit remains passive. PLC (active) EEx ia type DP/ Non-hazardous Area PA coupler Hazardous Area EEx ia device EEx ia device EEx ia device 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 159… -
Page 168: Device Nameplate
Device Nameplate Note: ATEX certificates and connection drawings listed below can be downloaded from the product page of our website at: https://pia.khe.siemens.com/index.asp?Nr=7427. Page 160 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 169: Atex Certificate
ATEX Certificate 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 161…
-
Page 170
Page 162 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 171: Instructions Specific To Hazardous Area Installations
Suitable precautions: e.g. regular checks as part of routine inspections or establishing from the material’s data sheet that it is resistant to specific chemicals. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 163…
-
Page 172: Appendix K: Firmware Revision History
05 Jul 2005 • MP&F parameters added to device 2.01.00 2.01.00 24 Feb 2006 • Improved linearity over ambient temperature 3.00.03 3.00.06 15 Feb 2008 • New Local User Interface Page 164 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 173: Glossary
Many conductive liquids/electrolytes exhibit dielectric properties; the relative dielec- tric constant of water is 80. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 165…
-
Page 174
Page 166 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 175
TVT (time varying threshold): a time-varying curve that determines the threshold level above which echoes are determined to be valid. waveguide antenna: a hollow, metallic tube that transmits a microwave signal to the product target. 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 167… -
Page 176
Notes Page 168 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 177: Index
Level application example 27 echo confidence 108 locking ring 14 echo profile saving set-screw size 16 via PDM 40 LOE timer 108 echo profile viewing loss of echo 108 via LUI 26 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 169…
-
Page 178
Programming SITRANS LR200 20 contact information 3 purging system terminal access 16 for horn antenna 145 troubleshooting operation 100 TVT curve 106 Quick Access to parameters via LUI 22 Page 170 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 179
12 selection 49 wear view via PDM 43 wiring hazardous areas 158 terminal access 16 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 171… -
Page 180
Notes Page 172 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 181: Lcd Menu Structure
LCD menu structure Siemens Industrial SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 173 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01…
-
Page 182
2.3.1.10 HUMAN INTERFACE 2.2.3.2.2 UP SAMP 2.3. 1 . 1 0. 1 DECIMAL POINT 2.2.3.2.3 DOWN SAMP 2.3.2 AIFB 2 (AS AIFB 1) 2.2.3.2.4 WINDOW Page 174 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 183
3.7.2 EVENT STAT 3.7.3 EVENT DIAG. 4. SERVICE 4. 1 DEVICE RESET 4.2 LCD FAST MODE 4.3 LCD CONTRAST 4.4 PROFIBUS IDENT 4.5 POWERED HOURS 4.6 POWERON RESETS (continued on next page) 7ML19985JR01 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Page 175… -
Page 184
4. 1 8.6 TOTAL CALIB. INT.. 4. 1 8.7 MAINT STAT 4. 1 8.8 ACK STATUS 4. 1 8.9 ACK 5. COMMUNICATION DEVICE ADDRESS 5.2 REMOTE LOCKOUT 6. SECURITY WRITE LOCKING 7. LANGUAGE Page 176 SITRANS LR200 (PROFIBUS PA) – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7ML19985JR01… -
Page 185
Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments Inc. Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments Inc. 2008 1954Technology Drive, P .O. Box 4225 Subject to change without prior notice Peterborough, ON, Canada K9J 7B1 Rev. 1.0 Tel: (705) 745-2431 Fax: (705) 741-0466 *7ml19985JR01 Email: techpubs.smpi@siemens.com…